Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
BTS Document
Sub-System Description
Release B10
Status RELEASED
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.1 Modularity and Common Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2.1 Cabinet Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2.2 Cabinet Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3 Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.3.2 Subrack Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4 Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.4.2 Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.5 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.1 Naming Conventions for the BTS Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2 Indoor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.1 Indoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.2 Indoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.2.3 Indoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.2.4 Indoor Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.2.5 Indoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.2.6 Indoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.2.7 AC Indoor Configurations GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.3 9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.3.1 G3 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.3.2 G3 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.3.3 G3 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.3.4 G3 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.3.5 G3 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.3.6 G3 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.4 9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.4.1 G4 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.4.2 G4 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.4.3 G4 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.4.4 G4 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.4.5 G4 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.4.6 G4 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.5 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.5.1 MBI Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 850/900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.5.2 MBI Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.5.3 MBI Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.5.4 MBI Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2.5.5 MBI Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 . . . 116
2.5.6 MBI Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
2.6 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI3 Cabinet) . . . . 134
2.6.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2.6.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.6.3 Multiband & MB Cell MBI3 - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 139
2.6.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
2.6.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2.6.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
2.6.7 Extended Cell MBI3 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.6.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for Outer Cell MBI3 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4
RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
2.6.9 Mixed High Power/Twin-TRX Configurations - Extended Cell - MBI3 - Extended
Cell with mixed HP/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
2.7 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant
AA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.7.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.7.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.7.3 Multiband & MB Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.7.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.7.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2.7.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
2.7.7 Extended Cell MBI5 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
2.7.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell MBI5 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4
RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
2.8 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant
AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.8.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.8.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
2.8.3 Multiband & MB Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2.8.4 Multiband Configurations Capacity Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
2.8.5 Multiband Configurations Coverage Mode with TX Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
2.8.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2.8.7 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2.8.8 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
2.8.9 Extended Cell MBI5 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2.8.10 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell MBI5 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4
RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
2.9 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX
(for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AA and AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2.9.1 MBI3 - 1 sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2.9.2 MBI3 - 2 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
2.9.3 MBI3 - 3 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
2.9.4 MBI5 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
2.9.5 MBI5 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
2.9.6 MBI5 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
2.10 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX
(Only in MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2.10.1 MBI5 AB variant - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.10.2 MBI5 AB variant - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 211
2.10.3 MBI5 AB variant - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 212
2.11 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed High Power/Twin-TRX Configurations (for MBI5
Cabinet Variant AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.11.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.11.2 Configurations Extended Cell - MBI5 - Extended Cell with mixed
HP/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.12 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant
Equipped with Three Subracks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2.12.1 MBI53 - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2.12.2 MBI53 - 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2.12.3 MBI53 - 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
2.12.4 MBI53 - 4 Sectors with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
2.13 Outdoor Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
2.13.1 Outdoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
2.13.2 Outdoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2.13.3 Outdoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
2.13.4 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Preface
Purpose The 9100 BTS Hardware Description describes the cabinets, subracks,
modules and cables of the 9100 BTS.
All equipment, features and functions described in this document may not be
available on your system.
In Edition 12
Section Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRX in 9100 BTS Outdoor Compact
(CPT2) (Section 2.14) was added for 9100 BTS Outdoor Compact (CPT2)
configurations with Twin TRE.
In Edition 11
Section describing the Range Extension Kit was removed.
Part numbers for TMA have been removed from Tower-Mounted Amplifier
(Section 15.3).
Additional information concerning external alarms was added in:
In Edition 10
Description improvement in SUMX LEDs (Section 8.8.2).
In Edition 09
Section Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX
(for MBI5 Cabinet Variant Equipped with Three Subracks) (Section 2.12)
was added.
Description improvement in:
In Edition 08
Following sections have been added:
Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5
Cabinet Variant AA) (Section 2.7)
Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX (for MBI5
Cabinet Variant AB) (Section 2.8)
Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension
with Twin TRX (for MBI5 Cabinet Variant AA and AB) (Section 2.9)
In Edition 07
Attention was added for the configurations supported only in MBI5 cabinet
variant AB.
Update with the new equipment naming.
In Edition 06
Description improvement in:
In Edition 05
Section Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support (Section 15.2.2) was
added.
The following sections were added:
In Edition 04
Section Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support (Section 15.2.2) was
added.
Description improvement in Transceiver Equipments LEDs (Section 9.2.6).
In Edition 03
Section AGCL9P was removed. Reference to AGCL9P was removed from
the document.
In Edition 02
The following sections were added:
Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional
Variant B (Section 10.4.7.2)
In Edition 01
First release of the document.
Commissioning personnel
System support engineers
Assumed Knowledge The reader must have a general knowledge of telecommunications systems,
terminology and BTS functions.
1 Overview
This Overview gives information needed for project managers and foremen, for
the presentation to the customer and site planning.
Four types of subrack: the SRACDC, ACSR, and ASIB house the AC/DC
power modules; STASR houses the telecommunications modules and
AC/DC power modules
Configurations These building blocks are used to assemble all possible 9100 BTS configurations,
as described in Configurations - Rack Layouts (Section 2) .
Grounding 9100 BTS equipment installations are grounded throughout, via a distributed
earthing system which interconnects all metallic parts with the cabinet ground. A
cabinet bus bar (or a cableform equivalent) is an important part of this earthing
system. The bus bar complies with European standard EN60950 V2. Equipment
cabinets must be connected to a suitable external system ground at the installation
site.
Units of Standard TEP units of measurement apply for 9100 BTS equipment. Metric and
Measurement imperial equivalents for the TEP units are as follows:
Standards All 9100 BTS equipment complies with the following ETSs:
ETS 300 342-2 EMC for European Digital Cellular Telecommunications Systems
1.2 Cabinets
1.2.1 Cabinet Overview
The type of cabinet used depends on a number of different items required for
a particular installation. The following sections describe the cabinet types
and requirements for:
Indoor cabinets
Outdoor cabinets
Configurations
Cabling.
CIDE - five STASRs, or four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or
BU100s
MBI3 - three STASRs, or two STASRs and a battery area for BU101s
MBI5 - five STASRs, or four STASRs and a battery area for BU101s.
COMI - two STASRs and one SRACDC or ACSR and a battery area for
BU41s or BU100s and MV area
COME - five STASRs and one SRACDC or ACSR and a battery area for
BU41s or BU100s and MV area
CODI - four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and MV area
CODE - seven STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and
MV area
MBO2E - six STASRs, power supplies subrack and an optional area for
batteries or microwave
CBO - two STASRs with a MW area and optional BATS for the AC variant.
For more information about the CIMI/CIDI and CIMA/CIDE, refer to CIMI/CIDI
(Section 3.1) and CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.2) , respectively. For more information
about the BU41 and BU100, refer to BU41 (Section 12.24) and BU100 (Section
12.25) respectively.
230 VAC 1
400 VAC 3.
The CBO and MBO1T cabinet are designed to operate from external AC
mains supplies 230 VAC 1.
The AC input is converted to 0/ -48 VDC nom. for use within the cabinets.
In the event of a mains failure, an optional battery backup unit, BU41 or BU100,
can be used to provide the DC supply voltage.
The CBO DC and MBO1DC/MBO2DC cabinets are designed to operate from
external DC mains supplies. The 0/ -48 VDC nom. input is distributed for use
within the cabinets.
For more information about the COMI/CODI, COME/CODE, CPT2, CBO and
MBO1/MBO2, refer to Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4) . For more information
about the BU41, BU100 and BU101, refer to BU41 (Section 12.24) , BU100
(Section 12.25) and BU101 (Section 12.26) respectively.
1.2.1.5 Cabling
The cable sets supplied with the 9100 BTS fall into the following categories:
Power
Abis links
Internal interconnection.
MBO1E 1610 mm/26 HU 940 mm/ 185 WU 750 90 kg for empty cabinet
mm
MBO2/MBO2DC 1500 mm/ 24 HU 1500 mm/ 295 WU 750 175 kg not equipped w/
mm o battery
MBO2E 1610 mm/26 HU 1550 mm/ 305 WU 750 150 kg for empty cabinet
mm
1.3 Subracks
1.3.1 Overview
The subracks are constructed from two steel side plates and five metal
extrusions which form a frame box. Attached to the frame box are the
backplane module and FANU guide rails, and other components such as a
ground connector. The subrack is equipped with six integral lugs which enable
it to be fixed to the equipment rack with self-tapping screws.
The subracks conform to ETSI standard IEC297-3 for 19 inch
telecommunications equipment practice.
The subrack plug-in modules are electrically connected by inserting them into
the backplane connectors along plastic guide rails. The connectors have
guide-pins which ensure the module and subrack connectors mate together,
without the risk of bending the connector pins.
The plug-in modules are secured in the subrack with Camloc quarter-turn
fasteners.
There are four types of subrack:
STASR
The STASR is the basic subrack used for all indoor and outdoor applications.
It can contain a mixture of telecommunications and power supply plug-in
modules. When the subrack contains TREs additional components, the
FANU and FACB, are attached to the subrack.
For more information about the STASR, refer to Standard
Telecommunications Subrack (Section 6) .
SRACDC
The SRACDC is an AC power supply subrack for 9100 BTS outdoor
configurations. For more information about the SRACDC, refer to SRACDC
(Section 7.1) .
ACSR
The ACSR is an AC power supply subrack used for 9100 BTS outdoor
configurations. For more information about the ACSR, refer to ACSR
(Section 7.2) .
ASIB
The ASIB is only used for indoor applications. For more information about
the ASIB, refer to ASIB (Section 7.3) .
ABAC AC Indoor Battery Control Unit 3BK 08673 ABAC (Section 12.20)
AFIP AC Indoor Filter Panel 3BK 08674 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply and
Grounding (Section 3.2.7)
ANCD Antenna Network Combined GSM 1800 3BK 08995 ANC (Section 10.3)
Module
ANCG Antenna Network Combined GSM 900 3BK 08993 ANC (Section 10.3)
Module
ANCL Antenna Network Combined GSM 850 3BK 25900 ANC (Section 10.3)
Module
ANCP Antenna Network Combined GSM 1900 3BK 25393 ANC (Section 10.3)
Module
ANXD Antenna Network X GSM 1800 Module 3BK 07241 ANX (Section 10.1)
ANXG Antenna Network X GSM 900 Module 3BK 07232 ANX (Section 10.1)
ANXP Antenna Network GSM 1900 Module 3BK 08459 ANX (Section 10.1)
ANYD Antenna Network Y GSM 1800 Module 3BK 07245 ANY (Section 10.2)
ANYG Antenna Network Y GSM 900 Module 3BK 07237 ANY (Section 10.2)
ANYL Antenna Network Y GSM 850 Module 3BK 25903 ANY (Section 10.2)
ANYP Antenna Network Y GSM 1900 Module 3BK 08465 ANY (Section 10.2)
APOD AC Indoor Power Distribution Panel 3BK 08675 APOD (Section 12.11)
BU101 Battery Unit 100 Ah for using in MBO 3BK 25854 BU101 (Section 12.26)
DAC8 Direct Air Cooling 8 used in MBOEE 3BK 27794 DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.6)
DAC9 Direct Air Cooling 9 used in MBO1E 3BK 27795 DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.6)
FACB Fan Control Board 3BK 07202 Cooling System (Section 11.1)
HEX3 Heat Exchanger 3 for using in MBOE 3BK 25659 HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3)
HEX4 Heat Exchanger 4 for using in MBO1 3BK 25660 HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3)
HEX5 Heat Exchanger 5 for using in CBO 3BK 26325 HEX5 (Section 11.4)
HEX8 Heat Exchanger 8 for using in MBOEE 3BK 27148 HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5)
HEX9 Heat Exchanger 9 for using in MBO1E 3BK 27149 HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5)
LPFC Lightning Protection and Filter Unit 3BK 26322 LPFC (Section 12.2)
Compact
LPFMT Lightning Protection and Filter Unit Tropical 3BK 27141 LPFMT (Section 12.3)
LPFM Lightning Protection and Filter Unit 3BK 25786 LPFM (Section 12.4)
Multistandard
LPFU Lightning Protection and Filter Unit 3BK 25157 LPFU (Section 12.5)
SUMA Station Unit Module Advanced 3BK 08925 Station Unit Modules (Section
8)
SUMP Station Unit Module PCM 3BK 07224 Station Unit Modules (Section
8)
SUMX Station Unit Module Type X 3BK 27656 Station Unit Modules (Section
8)
TADH Transceiver Module GSM 1800 High Power 3BK 25373 Transceiver Equipment
(Section 9)
TAGH Transceiver Module GSM 900 High Power 3BK 26154 Transceiver Equipment
(Section 9)
TRAD Transceiver Module GSM 1800 Medium 3BK 08980 Transceiver Equipment
Power (Section 9)
TRADE Transceiver Module GSM 1800 Medium 3BK 26526 Transceiver Equipment
Power Enhanced 8-PSK power (Section 9)
TRAG Transceiver Module GSM 900 Medium 3BK 08967 Transceiver Equipment
Power (Section 9)
TRAGE Transceiver Module GSM 900 Medium 3BK 26525 Transceiver Equipment
Power Enhanced 8-PSK power (Section 9)
TRAL Transceiver Module GSM 850 Medium 3BK 25894 Transceiver Equipment
Power (Section 9)
TRAP Transceiver Module GSM 1900 Medium 3BK 25825 Transceiver Equipment
Power (Section 9)
TRDH Transceiver Module GSM 1800 High Power 3BK 07723 Transceiver Equipment
(Section 9)
TRDM Transceiver Module GSM 1800 Medium 3BK 07372 Transceiver Equipment
Power (Section 9)
TRGM Transceiver Module GSM 900 Medium 3BK 07206 Transceiver Equipment
Power (Section 9)
DCDUE -
FACB -/ 95 -/ 55 - -
1.5 Cables
Most 9100 BTS cables are common to both the mini and medi cabinets.
The number of standard RF cables that are used varies according to the
configuration.
The cabling consists of both:
The grouping of certain cables into cable sets can provide advantages in terms
of ease of installation or manufacturing.
The 9100 BTS cables are categorized as internal and external cables.
Internal Cables
These are the cables and cable sets that are internal to the BTS. They
interconnect the various modules and are necessary for all configurations.
External Cables
These are the cables that connect the 9100 BTS to:
The customers 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board
The customers 0/ -48 V DC power source and ground point (indoor
9100 BTSs)
The BTS Terminal
Another BTS for clock synchronization.
This chapter shows all possible configurations of the rack layouts for the
following BTS types.
Connection Area
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
S
U IDU 1 IDU 2 ANC 1
M ( Sector 1 ) a b
A ANC 1
TRE 1 2 3 4
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Empty space
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Connection Area
The BTS has 2 sectors with
respectively n and p TREs
ANC 2 S ANC 1
IDU 1 U
( Sector 2 ) M ( Sector 1 )
A a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Empty space
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
On each ANC:
The two bridges will be removed
at installation time (On site)
ANC 2 S ANC 1
IDU 1 U a b a b
( Sector 2 ) M ( Sector 1 )
A ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 2 3 TRE 1
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
Empty space
AIR
S
U Empty space
M
A
On each ANC:
TRE1 TRE1 TRE1 The two bridges will be removed
FANU FANU FANU at installation time (On site)
If ANY2 only:
ANY2 is connected to ANX
Dummy Panels
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Connection Area
Stage 3 a b
ANC
IDU 1 IDU 2
ANY 1 ANY 2
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
a b
ANX
Stage 3
ANY1
ANY2 ANY3
IDU 1 IDU2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If ANY2 only:
ANY2 connected to ANX
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
Empty space
Dummy Panels
Connection Area
TRE12 TRE11 TRE10 TRE9
The BTS has n TREs
a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANC 1
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
a b
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANC 2
S
U ANY ANY ANC 1
M 2 1 TRE 9 10 11 12
A
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
Top Stage FANU FANU FANU
TRE6 TRE5 TRE4 TRE3
Connection Area
TRE6 TRE5 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 2 sectors with
respectively n and p TREs
a b
TRE2 TRE1
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU ANC 2
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Empty space
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANC 1
TRE 1 2 3 4 5678
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
a b
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANC 2
S
U ANY ANY ANC 1
M 2 1 (Sector 1)
TRE 1 2 3 4
A
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
Top Stage FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
Dummy Panels
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Connection Area
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 3 sectors with
respectively n, p and q TREs
a b
ANC 3
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU TRE 1 2 3 4
S ANC 1
U ( Sector 1 )
M
A
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
Empty space
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
Connection Area
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 3 sectors with
respectiv ely n, p and q TREs
a b a b
ANX1 ANX2
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANY2 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4
ANY3 ANX3 ANY2 ANX2
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
a b
ANX3
ANY3
TRE 1 2 3 4
S
U ANY1 ANX1
M IDU1 IDU2
(Sector 1)
A
Empty space
Figure 11: Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4 Configuration (GSM 1900; ANX version)
TRE4 TRE3
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
Extension from
1x6 to 1x8
Connection Area
TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
TRE 1 2 7 8 TRE 3 4 5 6
IDU1 IDU2 ANC2 Both ANCs are set to the
same sector number
In case of 1x3...4,
on each ANC,
The bridges will be removed
TRE4 TRE3 at installation (on site)
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU if no more than 2 TREs are
onnected to them
SUMA ANC1
Extension from
1x6 to 1x8
Empty space
TRE8 TRE7 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 1x11...12 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 1x1...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
Connection Area
TRE12 TRE11 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
a b a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 2 7 8 TRE 3 4 5 6
ANC 3 IDU 1 IDU 2 ANC 2
a b
ANC 3
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
Top Stage FANU FANU FANU
TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5
In each sector,
both ANXs are set to
the same sector number.
Extension from
2x4 to 2x6
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 Dummy Panels
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 2x3...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
Connection Area The BTS has 2 sectors with
TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 respectively n and p TREs
Sector 1:
a b a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANC1 ANC2
ANC3 ANC2
IDU1 IDU2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1) TRE 1 2 3 456
Sector 2:
a b a b
ANC3 ANC4
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
TRE 1 2 3 456
In case of 2x3...4:
On each ANC:
The two bridges will be removed
at installation time (On site),
if no more than 2 TREs are
connected to them
ANC2 S ANC1
IDU1 U a b a b
( Sector 2 ) M ( Sector 1 )
A ANC1 ANC2
TRE 1 TRE 1
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC2 S ANC1
IDU 1 U
( Sector 2 ) M ( Sector 1 )
A
TRE1 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Figure 16: Indoor MINI - 2x1 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU On site, on the ANC:
Bridges can be removed if only
2 TREs connected to the ANC
IDU1 IDU2
With classical HP TRE:
Connection Area
TRE4
S
U ANC1 TRE4
M (Sector 1)
A
S
U ANC1
M (Sector 1)
A
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Microwave IDU
(Optional) TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
Empty space
Figure 17: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANC2
IDU1 IDU2
(Sector 2)
S
U ANC1
M (Sector 1) TRE4
A TRDH
TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
S
U ANC1
M (Sector 1)
A
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Empty space
Figure 18: Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
a b
TRE1
ANC3
TRE2 TRE1
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1
Connection Area
On each ANC, t he two bridges are
TRE2 removed at installation (on site).
ANC3 ANC2
(Sector 3) IDU1 IDU2
(Sector 2)
With classical HP TREs:
Connection Area
TRE2
ANC1
SUMA
(Sector 1)
TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
ANC1
SUMA (Sector 1)
TRE2 TRE1
TRE2 TRE1
Figure 19: Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
For 3x3:
(HP) (HP) (HP)
On each ANC:
TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The bridge where the MP TRE
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU is connected is removed on site
ANC3 ANC2
(MP) (HP) (HP) (Sector 3)
IDU1 IDU2
(Sector 2)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Figure 20: Indoor MEDI - 3x1...3 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
TMA TMA
A B PDU 1
ANC
Sector 2
A B
TRE 2 TRE 4 ANC
TRE 1 TRE 3 Sector 1
TRE 2 TRE 4
TRE 1 TRE 3
The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI extended cell
configuration based on RX TMA use.
Connection Area
The BTS has 2 sectors with
respectively n and p TREs:
n TREs in the Outer Cell
p TREs in the Inner Cell
Stage 3
Inner Cell:
ANC2
IDU1 IDU2 Inner Cell
a b
(Sector 2)
ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4
Outer Cell:
a b
ANC1
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU TRE 1 2 3 4
S ANC1
U Outer Cell
M
A (Sector 1)
Empty space
Figure 22: Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use
GSM 1800
ANC 2 S ANC 1 a b a b
IDU 1 U ANC 1 ANC 2
( Sector 2 ) M ( Sector 1 )
A
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
Microwave IDU
(Optional)
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU GSM 1800
On each ANC:
The two bridges will be removed
at installation time (On site)
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4 56
TRE6 TRE5
a b
ANC2
TRE6 TRE5
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANY3 ANY4
ANC1
SUMA ANY2 ANY1 (Sector 1)
TRE 1 2 5 6 34
GSM 1800
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Empty space
Dumm y panels
SUM ANY3 ANY1 ANY2 ANX1
(Sector 1)
Connection Area
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 The BTS has 2 sectors with
respectiv ely n and p TREs
a b
a b
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1
(Sector 1)
GSM 1800
Empty space
a b
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7
a b
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1
(Sector 1)
GSM 1800
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
GSM 1800
Dummy panels
Connection Area
TRE4 TRE3 TRE6 TRE5 In case of 1x3...4LL/1x1...4
On ANC1 and ANC2:
The bridges will be removed
at installation time (on site),
if no more than 2 TREs are
connected to them
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU The BTS has 2 sectors with
respectively n and p TREs
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
TRE 1 2 7 8 TRE 3 4 5 6
TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU the same sector number
S
U ANC1 a b
M (Sector 1) ANC3
A
TRE 1 2
3 4
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
Connection Area
The BTS has 3 sectors with
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
respectively n, p and q TREs
a b a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC1 ANC2
a b
ANC3
ANC1
SUMA ( Sector 1 )
GSM 1800
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Connection Area
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 3 sectors with
respectively n, p and q TREs
a b a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANC1 ANC2
a b
ANC3
ANC1
SUMA ( Sector 1 )
GSM 1800
Microwave IDU (Optional)
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
In sectors 2 and 3,
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 if 2 TREs max. in the sector
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Connection Area
The BTS has 4 sectors with
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
respectively n, p, q and r TREs
a b a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANC1 ANC2
a b a b
ANC3 ANC4
ANC4 ANC1
SUMA
( Sector 4 ) ( Sector 1 )
GSM 1800
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
In sectors 2 and 3:
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
if 2 TREs max. in the sector
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
Connection Area
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 4 sectors with
respectively n, p, q and r TREs
a b a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANC1 ANC2
a b a b
ANC3 ANC4
GSM 1800
Microwave IDU (Optional)
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
In sectors 2 and 3:
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 if 2 TREs max. in the sector.
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
ANC4 SUMA ANC1
(Sector 4) (Sector 1)
GSM 1800
In sectors 2 and 3:
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
if 2 TREs max. in the sector
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC4 SUMA ANC1
(Sector 4) (Sector 1)
GSM 1800
Microwave IDU (Optional)
GSM 1800
Connection Area
a b a b
S ANC1 ANC2
ANC2 IDU1 U ANC1
M
A TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU GSM 1800
On each ANC:
The two bridges will be removed
at installation time (On site)
GSM 1800
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Dummy Panels
ANY1 ANY2
IDU1 ANY4 ANY3 ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4 56
a b
TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 ANC2
ANY3 ANY4
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
TRE 1 2 5 6 34
SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1
Both ANCs are set to the same
sector number
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Dummy Panels
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Connection Area
Sector 1 has:
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
n TREs in the GSM 900 band
p TREs in the GSM 1800 band
Sector 2 has:
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
r TREs in the GSM 900 band
q TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANC3 IDU1 IDU2 ANC2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1) a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2
STASR 3
ANC 1 and ANC 2 are set to
the same sector number (1)
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
a b a b
ANC4
SUMA
ANC1 ANC3 ANC4
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC3 and ANC4 are set to
the same sector number (2)
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Sector 2 has:
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
q TREs in the GSM 1800 band
r TREs in the GSM 900 band
ANY ANX3 ANY ANX2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
ANX1 and ANX2 are set to
the same sector number (1)
GSM 1800
a b a b
ANC3 IDU1 IDU2 ANC2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1) ANC1 ANC2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to
STASR 3 the same sector number (1)
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
a b a b
ANC3 ANC2
IDU1 IDU2 ANC3
(Sector 1) (Sector 2) ANC1
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
TRE4 TRE3 ANC1 and ANC3 are set to
STASR 3
TRE4 TRE3
the same sector number (1)
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
Microwave IDU (Optional)
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Empty space
BTSCA AFIP
a b
A
ABAC APOD C ANX
R
I
TRE 1 2 3 4 5678
Connection Area
The BTS has n TREs
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
a b
ANC
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANY1 ANY2
ANY2 ANY1 ANC
TRE 1 2 3 4 5678
BTSCA AFIP
BBU
Connection Area
The BTS has 3 sectors with
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 respectively n, p and q TREs
a b a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC1 ANC2
a b
TRE2 TRE1 ANC3
BATS
TRE 1 2
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ADAM
a b
ANC1
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
ANY1
BATS
SUMA or ANY2 ANC2
2 x IDU (Sector 2)
TRE 1 2 34 5 6
a b
TRE2 TRE1
ANC2
TRE6 TRE5
TRE 1 2 34 5 6
PM12 PM12 PM12 ANY1 ANC1
(Sector 1)
a b a b
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU ANC 1 ANC 2
BATS
ANC 3 or ANC 2 TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4
( Sector 3 ) 2 x IDU ( Sector 2 )
a b
ANC 3
S ANC 1
P P P U
M M M M ( Sector 1 )
1 1 1 A
2 2 2
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
a b
ANC 1
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANY 1 ANY 2
DC
AFIP BTSCA
Power Cable
Subrack AC/DC ASIB
BU41
AC Cabinet DC Cabinet
Cabinet Number of AC DC
sectors
Carriesrs per Carriesrs per
sector sector
Cabinet Number of AC DC
sectiors
Carriesrs per Carriesrs per
sector sector
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 46 8
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
1234567
Connection Area
ADAM
1234567
1234567
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
PM1 2 PM1 2
1234567
BATS
1234567
(Option) a b
1234567
1234567
ANC1
FANU FANU
Air Inlet
1234567
FANU TRE 1 3 2 4
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 2x4 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 2x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
ANC2 SUMA ANC1
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3TREs
Dummy Panel
Empty space
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
Connection Area
ADAM 1234567
1234567
1234567
The BTS has 2 sectors:
Sector 1 with n TREs,
1234567
BATS
(Option) Sector 2 with p TREs
1234567
PM1 2 PM1 2
FANU FANU
1234567
1234567FANU
a b
ANC1
a b
ANC2
Air Inlet
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
ANC2 ANC1
SUMA Sector 1 Sector 2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
Empty space
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
ANC2 ANC1 a b
(Sector 2) SUMA (Sector 1) ANC3
TRE 1 2
Dummy Panel Sector 3
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
STAND
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
Connection Area
ADAM 1234567
1234567
1234567
The BTS has 3 sectors,
one TRE per sector
1234567
BATS
(Option)
1234567
PM1 2 PM1 2
FANU FANU
1234567
1234567FANU
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
Air Inlet
TRE 1 TRE 1
ANC3 ANC2 ANC1 Sector 1 Sector 2
(Sector 3) (Sector 2) (Sector 1)
a b
ANC3
Dummy Panel
TRE 1
Sector 3
SUMA
The ANC can be replaced
by the ANB also
TRE1 TRE1 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU Empty space
Air Inlet
STAND
Connection Area
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
a b
ANC1
ANY1 ANY2
12345678 1234567
FANU FANU FANU
12345678 1234567
Air Inlet
12345678 1234567
ADAM
12345678
12345678
PM1 2 1234567
1234567
PM1 2 123
PM1 2
SUMA BATS
(Option)
Modules present only
in AC configuration
12345678
123456 1234567
123456
12345678 1234567
Empty space
123456123456
FANU
1234567 FANU FANU
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
BBU or STASR
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
(Option)
1234567890123456 STAND
ANY1 ANY2
123456
Air Inlet
123456
123456 BATS a b
123456
ANY 2 ANY 1 ANC1
(Option)
ANC2
123456
123456 TRE
9
11 10
12
12345678
FANU FANU FANU
12345678
Air Inlet
12345678
ADAM
12345678
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
SUMA ANC2 123
123
Modules present only
in AC configuration
12345678
12345678
Empty space
Dummy Panel
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
Connection Area
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
ANC2 ANC1
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Dummy Panel
SUMA
PM12 PM12 PM12
Empty space
Air Inlet
BBU
(BU101)
STAND
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
a b
ANC1
Sector 1
ANY1
123456
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
123456
123456
TRE 1 3 2 4 56
123456
123456
SUMA BATS
(Option)
ANY 2 ANC2
(Sector 2)
a b
123456
ANC2
123456
Sector 2
12345678
FANU
12345678
Air Inlet
ADAM The ANC can be replaced by the
12345678
12345678
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
12345678 123
ANY 1 ANC1
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 (Sector 1) Modules present only
12345678 123
in AC configuration
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850 and GSM 1900.
a b
Sector 1 ANC1
123456
FANU FANU FANU TRE 1 3 2 4
123456
Air Inlet
123456
123456 a b
123456
ANY 2 BATS ANY 1 ANC2
(Option) (Sector 2) Sector 2 ANC2
123456
123456
ANY1 ANY2
Dummy Panel
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 46 8
12345678
FANU FANU FANU
12345678
Air Inlet
12345678
ADAM
12345678
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
SUMA ANC1
123 Modules present only
12345678 123
(Sector 1)
in AC configuration
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
ANC2 ANC1
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
a b
ANC3
TRE 1 2
Sector 3
P P P S
M M M U
1 1 1 M
2 2 2 A
Empty space
Air Inlet
BBU
(BU101)
STAND
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
a b a b a b
FANU FANU FANU
ANC1 ANC2 ANC3
123456
Air Inlet
123456
123456
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
123456
ANC3 BATS ANC2
(Sector 3) (Option) (Sector 2)
123456
123456
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
12345678
12345678 ADAM
Air Inlet
12345678
12345678 SUMA
12345678 12
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 ANC1
(Sector 1) Modules present only
12345678 12
in AC configuration
123456789 1234567
Connection Area
123456789
123456789
ADAM
1234567
1234567 The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
123456789
123456789
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 1234567
BATS
1234567
(Option)
123456789 1234567
a b a b
123456789 1234567
ANC1 ANC2
On each ANC:
Dummy Panel
The two bridges will be removed
at installation time (on site)
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
TRE 1 5 2 6 TRE 3 7 4 8
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
Both ANCs are set to the same
sector number
ANC2 ANC1
In case of 1x3...4
12345678 1234567
FANU FANU FANU
12345678 1234567
Air Inlet
ADAM
12345678
12345678 1234567
1234567123 Modules present only
12345678 1234567123
SUMA BATS
in AC configuration
(Option)
12345678 1234567
PM12 PM12 PM12
Empty space
123456
12345678
123456
FANU123456
1234567
123456
1234567 FANU FANU
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
BBU or STASR
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
(Option)
1234567890123456 STAND
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 1x11...12 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 1x1...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
a b a b
FANU FANU FANU
ANC1 ANC2
1234567
Air Inlet
1234567
1234567
TRE 15 2 6 374 8
1234567
BATS
ANC2 ANC1
(Option)
1234567
1234567
a b
ANC3
1234567
Dummy Panel
TRE 9 11
10 12
123456789
123456789
Air Inlet
123456789
ADAM
123456789
123456789
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
SUMA ANC3
123
123456789 123
Modules present only
in AC configuration
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40 C or with 28 W at + 45 C.
Configurations up to 2x3...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet TRE 1 2 3 5 46
Sector 2:
ANC3 ANC2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
a b a b
ANC3 ANC4
Dummy Panel
TRE 1 2 3 5 46
In each sector:
Both ANCs are set to the same
sector number
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
Dummy Panel
Empty space
12345678 123456
Connection Area with 1 TRE each
12345678
12345678
ADAM
123456
123456
12345678
12345678
PM12 PM12 123456
BATS
123456
(Option)
12345678 123456
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
12345678
FANU FANU
Air Inlet
123456
FANU
TRE 1 TRE 1
Connection Area
123456
Air Inlet
123456
ANC1
123456
123456 BATS
TRE 1 3 2 4
123456
123456
(Option)
123456
Dummy Panel
On site, on the ANC:
The two bridges can be removed
if only 2 TREs are connected
TRE4
12345678
Air Inlet
12345678
12345678
ADAM
123
Empty space
12345678 123
Modules present only
SUMA ANC1 in AC configuration
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
12345678
12345678 Dummy Panel
Connection Area
TRE4 TRE3
123456
FANU FANU FANU
a b a b
123456
Air Inlet
ANC1 ANC2
123456
123456
BATS ANC2 TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
123456
(Option) (Sector 2)
123456
123456 On site, on each ANC:
Dummy Panel The two bridges can be removed
if only 2 TREs are connected
TRE4
12345678
FANU FANU
Empty space
12345678 12
Air Inlet
Modules present only
12345678 12
ADAM
in AC configuration
12345678
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
SUMA
ANC1
12345678
(Sector 1)
a b a b a b
ANC1 ANC2 ANC3
123456
FANU FANU FANU TRE 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2
123456
Air Inlet
ANC3
123456
123456 BATS ANC2 In case of 3x1...2:
(Sector 3)
123456
123456
(Option) (Sector 2)
On each ANC:
123456
123456 Dummy Panel
The two bridges can be removed
if only 2 TREs are connected (on site).
One HP TRE transmitting per antenna.
12345678
12345678ADAM
Air Inlet
12345678 12
Empty space
12345678 12
S
U ANC1 Modules present only
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 M in AC configuration
(Sector 1)
12345678
A
TMA TMA
DC
Bias T
A B
PDU 1
DC
ANC Bias T
Sector 2
A B
TRE 2 TRE 4 ANC
TRE 1 TRE 3 Sector 1
TRE 2 TRE 4
TRE 1 TRE 3
The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - Extended Cell
Configuration Based on RX TMA Use.
Inner Cell:
a b
FANU FANU FANU ANC1
123456
Air Inlet
123456
TRE 1 3 2 4
123456
123456
BATS
(Option)
ANC2
Outer Cell
Outer Cell:
123456
123456
(Sector 2)
a b
TRE4
123456
Dummy Panel
TRE 1 3 2 4
12345678
FANU FANU FANU
12345678
Air Inlet
12345678
ADAM
12345678
P
12345678
M
P
M
P
12
M
S
U
ANC1
Inner Cell
12345678 12
1 1 1 M
2 2 2 A (Sector 1) Modules present only
12345678
123456123456
1234567
in AC configuration
123456
FANU
123456
1234567 FANU FANU Empty space
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
BBU or STASR
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
(Option)
1234567890123456 STAND
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
Dummy Panel
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Empty space
a b
ANC1
Sector 1
ANY1
FANU FANU FANU
123456
123456
Air Inlet
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
123456
123456
123456
SUMA BATS ANY 2 ANC2
a b
(Option) (Sector 2)
123456
123456
Sector 2
ANC2
123456
TRE6
Dummy Panel
TRE5 TRE 1 3
ANY2
2 456
12345678
12345678 ADAM
Air Inlet
12345678
12345678 ANC1
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 ANY 1 (Sector 1)
12345678
12345678 Dummy Panel GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Empty space
12
12
Modules present only
in AC configuration
a b
Sector 1 ANC1
TRE 1 3 2 4
123456
FANU FANU FANU
123456
Air Inlet
123456
a b
ANC2
123456
Sector 2
ANY 1 ANC2
123456
ANY 2 BATS
(Option) (Sector 2) ANY1 ANY2
123456
123456 TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Dummy Panel
12345678
FANU FANU FANU ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
12345678
Air Inlet
ADAM
12345678
12345678
ANC1
(Sector 1)
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
12345678 123
Empty space
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 SUMA
12345678 123
Modules present only
12345678
in AC configuration
Dummy Panel
a b
Sector 1 ANC1
TRE 1 3 2 4
123456
FANU FANU FANU
123456
Air Inlet
123456
a b
ANC2
123456
Sector 2
ANY 2 BATS ANY 1 ANC2
123456
123456
(Option) (Sector 2) ANY1 ANY2
12345678
The ANC can be replaced by the
12345678
Air Inlet ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
ADAM
12345678
12345678
ANC1
(Sector 1) GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
12345678
SUMA
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
12345678 123
Empty space
1234567
FANU FANU FANU
a b a b
1234567
Air Inlet
Sector 1 ANC1 ANC2
1234567
1234567 BATS
TRE 12 7 8 3 4 5 6
1234567
ANC3 ANC2
(Option)
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
1234567
1234567 Sector 2
a b
ANC3
Dummy Panel
TRE 1 3 2 4
12345678
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet The two bridges will be removed
12345678
12345678
ADAM
at installation time (on site), if no
more than 2 TREs are connected
12345678
to them.
ANC1
12345678
SUMA (Sector 1)
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
12345678
12345678 Dummy Panel
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
123
123
Modules present only
in AC configuration
Empty space
TRE8 TRE7 TRE2 TRE1
Connection Area
1234567
FANU FANU FANU
a b a b a b
1234567
Air Inlet
ANC1 ANC2 ANC3
1234567
1234567 BATS
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
1234567
ANC3 ANC2
(Option) Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
1234567
1234567
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Dummy Panel
12345678
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
12345678
12345678
ADAM
12345678
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
SUMA
ANC1
(Sector 1)
12345678
12345678 Dummy Panel
123
123
Modules present only
in AC configuration
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Connection Area
1234567
FANU FANU FANU
a b a b a b
1234567
Air Inlet
ANC1 ANC2 ANC3
1234567
1234567 BATS
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
1234567
ANC3 ANC2
(Option) Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
1234567
1234567 The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Dummy Panel
12345678
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
12345678
12345678
ADAM
12345678
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
SUMA
ANC1
(Sector 1)
12345678
12345678 Dummy Panel
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
123
123
Modules present only
in AC configuration
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 3 2 4
FANU FANU FANU
Sector 1 Sector 2
Air Inlet
a b a b
ANC3 ANC2
(Sector 3) (Sector 2) ANC3 ANC4
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 2
ANC4 S ANC1
U
(Sector 4) M (Sector 1)
A
Dummy Panel
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 3 2 4
FANU FANU FANU
Sector 1 Sector 2
Air Inlet
a b a b
ANC3 ANC2
(Sector 3) (Sector 2) ANC3 ANC4
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 2
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC4 S ANC1
U
(Sector 4) M (Sector 1)
A
Dummy Panel
Connection Area
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 2
ANC3 ANC2
(Sector 3) (Sector 2) Sector 1 Sector 2
a b a b
Dummy Panel
ANC3 ANC4
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 3 Sector 4
Dummy Panel
Connection Area
The BTS has 4 sectors with
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 respectively n, p, q and r TREs
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
ANC3 ANC2
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
a b a b
ANC3 ANC4
Dummy Panel
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 2
Sector 3 Sector 4
Dummy Panel
S TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 3 2 4
ANC2 U ANC1
M
A The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Dummy Panel
GSM 1800
Empty space
a b
ANC1
ANY1
123456
FANU FANU FANU
123456
Air Inlet
TRE 1 3 2 456
123456
123456
123456
SUMA BATS ANY 2 ANC2
a b
(Option)
123456
ANC2
123456
Dummy Panel ANY2
12345678
FANU
12345678
Air Inlet
If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required.
ADAM
12345678
TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.
12345678
12345678
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
ANY 1 ANC1
The ANC can be replaced by the
12345678
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Empty space
12
12
Modules present only
in AC configuration
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 3 2 4
123456
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
123456
123456
a b
ANC2
123456
123456
ANY 2 BATS
(Option)
ANY 1 ANC2
ANY1 ANY2
123456
123456 TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Dummy Panel
12345678
12345678 ADAM
Air Inlet The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
12345678
12345678 ANC1 GSM 1800
12345678
SUMA
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
12345678 123
Empty space
12345678 123
Modules present only
Dummy Panel in AC configuration
TRE 1 3 2 4
123456
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
123456
123456
a b
ANC2
123456
123456
ANY 2
BATS
(Option)
ANY 1 ANC2
ANY1 ANY2
123456
123456 TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Dummy Panel
12345678
12345678 ADAM
Air Inlet The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.
12345678
12345678 ANC1 GSM 1800
12345678
SUMA
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
12345678
12345678 Dummy Panel 123
Empty space
Modules present only
in AC configuration
Connection Area
Sector 1:
n TREs in GSM 900 band,
p TREs in GSM 1800 band
Dummy Panel
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 Sector 2:
q TREs in GSM 1800 band,
r TREs in GSM 900 band
GSM 1800
Empty space
ANC3 ANC2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 3 2 4
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 2
ANC4 ANC1
(Sector 2) SUMA (Sector 1)
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.
Dummy Panel
GSM 1800
Empty space
ANC3 ANC2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
(Sector 1) (Sector 2)
Sector 2:
Dummy Panel p TREs in GSM 1800 band,
TRE4 TRE3 r TREs in GSM 900 band
TRE4 TRE3
a b a b
FANU FANU FANU
ANC2 ANC4
Air Inlet
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 3 2 4
ANC4 SUMA ANC1
(Sector 2) (Sector 1) The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.
Dummy Panel
GSM 1800
Empty space
2.6.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for Outer Cell MBI3 - Extended Cell
TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus
p and r TRX in 1800 TRX.
Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900MHz and p TRX in
1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 TRX.
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n, q, s TRX in 900 MHz and p, r, t
TRX in 1800 MHz.
Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with
n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz
plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz
plus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz.
2.7.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell MBI5 - Extended Cell TX
Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus
p and r TRX in 1800 TRX.
Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900MHz and p TRX in
1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 TRX.
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n, q, s TRX in 900 MHz and p, r, t
TRX in 1800 MHz.
Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with
n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHz
plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz
plus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz.
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus
p and r TRX in 1800 MHz.
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in
1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz.
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n,q,s TRX in 900 MHz plus p,r,t
TRX in 1800 MHz.
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in
1800 MHz
plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz
plus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz.
2.8.10 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell MBI5 - Extended Cell
TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
Cabinet Number of AC DC
sectiors
Carriesrs per Carriesrs per
sector sector
Cabinet Number of AC DC
sectiors
Carriesrs per Carriesrs per
sector sector
OPTIONS
AIR
AIR
a b
AIR
ANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA ANC1
AIR
Empty space
a b
FANU FANU FANU
AIR ANC1
ANY1 ANY2
AIR
If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANY are
required preequipment possible.
AIR
a b a b
BATS ANC2 ANC1
ANC1 ANC2
TRE 1 TRE 1
ADAM2
SUMA
PM12 PM12
Empty space
FANU FANU
TRE1 TRE1
FANU
12
12
Options
HEAT3
OPTIONS
AIR
AIR
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
ANC2 ANC1
SUMA
(Sector 2) (Sector 1) TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
AIR
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
AIR
Empty space
AIR
OPTIONS
AIR
a b a b a b
FANU FANU FANU ANC2 ANC3
ANC1
AIR
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
ANC2 ANC1
(Sector 2) SUMA (Sector 1)
On each ANC, the bridges can be removed
at installation (on site), if maximum power is required.
AIR
Empty space
AIR
Empty space
Figure 96: Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2 - GSM 1900 Configuration (ANX version)
OPTIONS
Empty space,
no dummy panels needed
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
AIR AIR
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
a b
ANC1
FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ANY2 ANY1 ANC1
SUMA
If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANYs
are required Preequipment possible
AIR AIR
Empty Space
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 1x11...12 with 28 W at + 40 C.
Configurations up to 1x1...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR
AIR AIR
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
a b
ANC 1
S
U ANC 2 ANY ANY ANC 1 a b
M 2 1
A ANC 2
9
TRE 10 11 12
AIR AIR
Both ANCs are set to the same
sector number
Empty Space
TRE12 TRE11 TRE10 TRE9 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1800 configuration using TRAD/TRADE TREs, the following
restriction has to be considered: 2x5...6 with 45 W at + 40 C.
Configurations up to 2x1...4 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR The BTS has 2 sectors:
ACSU Sector 1 with n TREs
TRE5 TRE6 TRE6 TRE5 Sector 2 with p TREs
ADAM
a b
ANY1 ANC1
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2 ANC1
(Sector 1)
ANY1
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
AIR
a b
SUMA IDU1 IDU2 ANY2 ANC2
ANC2
(Sector 2)
ANY2
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 AIR
FANU FANU FANU TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 2x6 with 28 W at + 40 C.
Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR
Empty space,
no dummy panels needed
AIR AIR
AIR AIR
TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5 The BTS has 2 sectors :
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
a b
ANC1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4 56
ANC1 ANC2
SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANY4 ANY3
(Sector 1) (Sector 2) a b
ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4 56
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1800 configuration using TRAD/TRADE TREs, the following
restrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40 C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40 C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR
ACSU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 3 sectors:
ADAM
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC1 Sector 3 with q TREs
IDU2 (Sector 1)
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
ANC3 ANC2
IDU1 SUMA
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
TRE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Empty space
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40 C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR
OPTIONS
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 3 sectors:
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
Sector 3 with q TREs
AIR AIR
Empty Space
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40 C
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 3 sectors:
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
Sector 3 with q TREs
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 Empty space
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
OPTIONS
The BTS has one sector with n TREs
AIR AIR
Extension from
1x6 to 1x8
Empty space,
no dummy panels needed
AIR AIR
a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
AIR AIR
TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 5 6 7 8
Empty Space
AIR AIR
In case of 1x3...4:
On each ANC, the two bridges will be
removed at installation (on site), if no
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 more than 2 TREs are connected to them
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 1x11...12 with 28 W at + 40 C.
Configurations up to 1x1...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE12 TRE11 TRE10 TRE9
TRE1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 2x6 with 28 W at + 40 C.
Configurations up to 2x3...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR The BTS has 2 sectors:
TRE5 TRE6 TRE6 TRE5 Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
OPTIONS
In each sector:
Both ANXs are set to
the same sector number
FANU FANU FANU
When no ANY, TREs 3 and 4
AIR are directly connected to ANX
TRE 1 2 5 6 3 4
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR a b a b
ANC2 ANC3
(Sector 1) (Sector 2)
Extension from
2x4 to 2x6
Empty Space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
On each ANC, the two bridges will be
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU removed at installation (on site), if no
AIR AIR more than 2 TREs are connected to them
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictions
have to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40 C.
Configuration 3x3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45 C.
AIR AIR The BTS has 3 sectors:
Sector 1 with n TREs
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC6 ANC5 Sector 3 with q TREs
(Sector 3) (Sector 3)
Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
a b a b a b
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU ANC1 ANC2 ANC5
AIR AIR
TRE 1 2 12 12
TRE 3 4 3 4 3 4
AIR AIR
On each ANC, bridges are removed
at installation (on site), if no more
than 2 TREs are connected to them
TRE4
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4
Empty space
SUMA
ANC1
With classical HP TREs
AIR
AIR
TRE4
AIR
Figure 108: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
OPTIONS
TRDH TRDH
TRE1 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
a b a b
AIR ANC1 ANC2
AIR
Empty space
Figure 109: Outdoor MINI - 2x1 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
TRE2 a b a b
ANC1 ANC2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
AIR
On each ANC, bridges will be
removed at installation (on site).
AIR
TRE2
ANC2 ANC1
(Sector 2) SUMA (Sector 1)
AIR
Figure 110: Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1800 configuration using TADH TREs, the ambient temperature
is + 38 C.
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
AIR AIR
On each ANC, the two bridges are
removed at installation (on site),if no
more than 2 TREs are connected to them
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE4
AIR AIR
Figure 111: Outdoor MEDI- 2x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1800 configuration using TADH TREs, the ambient temperature
is + 40 C.
AIR The BTS has 3 sectors:
ACSU Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
TRE2
ADAM Sector 3 with q TREs
P P P ANC 1
M M M IDU 2 (Sector 1)
1 1 1
2 2 2 a b a b a b
FANU FANU FANU ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
AIR
AIR
S
ANC 3 U ANC 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
(Sector 3) IDU 1 M (Sector 2)
A
On each ANC:
TRE2 TRE1 Bridges will be removed at
AIR installation time, on site
FANU FANU FANU
Empty space
ACSU AIR
ADAM TRE2
P P P ANC 1
IDU 2
M M M (Sector 1)
1 1 1
2 2 2 FANU FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
S
ANC 3 IDU 1 U ANC 2
(Sector 3) M (Sector 2)
A
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
BBU
TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
LPFU AIR
Figure 112: Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
TRE2 TRE2
OPTIONS
a
S
ANX 1 ANX 3 ANX 2 U ANC 1 ANC 3 ANC 2
SUM (Sector 2) M ( Sector 1 ) ( Sector 3 ) ( Sector 2 )
(Sector 1) (Sector 3) A
TRE2 TRE1 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR AIR AIR
AIR AIR
Empty space,
TRE2 no dummy panels needed
a b a b a b
S ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
U ANC 1 ANC 3 ANC 2
M ( Sector 1 ) ( Sector 3 ) ( Sector 2 )
A
AIR AIR 1 2 1 2 1 2
Empty space,
no dummy panels needed
On each ANC:
TRE2 TRE1 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 The two bridges will be removed
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU at installation time (On site)
AIR AIR
Figure 113: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
a b a b a b
FANU FANU FANU ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
AIR AIR
nc nc nc
S 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
U ANC 1 HP MP HP MP HP MP
M (Sector 1) ANC 3 ANC 2
A (Sector 3) (Sector 2)
On each ANC:
"The bridge, where the TRE MP
AIR AIR is connected, is removed on site"
Empty slots.
No Dummy Panels
(MP) (HP) (HP) (HP) (HP) (HP)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
AIR AIR
TRE2 TRE3 TRE3
(HP) (MP) (MP)
S
U ANC 1
(Sector 1) ANC 3 ANC 2
M
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
A
AIR AIR
Figure 114: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...3 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
OPTIONS
Empty space,
AIR no dummy panels needed
GSM 1800
AIR
a b a b
AIR ANC 1 ANC 2
GSM 1800
Empty space
TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC 2 ANC 1
S Sector 1 Sector 2
( Sector 2 ) U
M ( Sector 1 )
A
AIR
GSM 1800
Empty space
Empty space,
ANY ANY ANY ANX ANY ANY ANY ANX no dummy panels needed
SUM 3 1 2 (Sector 1) 3 1 2 (Sector 2)
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
a b
ANC 1
ANY 1 ANY 2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
TRE 1 2 3 4 56
S ANC 1 ANC 2 a b
U ANY ANY ANY ANY ANC 2
M 2 1 ( Sector 1 ) 4 3 ( Sector 2 )
A
ANY 3 ANY 4
In each sector :
If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is
required, TRE1 to TRE4 are then
cabled on ANC
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Empty
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Space
AIR AIR GSM 1800
AIR AIR
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 3 sectors :
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
Sector 3 with q TREs
AIR AIR
GSM 1800
Empty Space
Empty space,
no dummy panels needed
ANY ANX ANY ANX ANY ANX
SUM 1 (Sector 1) 3 (Sector 3) 2 (Sector 2) GSM 1800
AIR AIR
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 3 sectors :
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
Sector 3 with q TREs
AIR AIR
Empty Space
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
ANC 3 S ANC 2
IDU 1 U
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
M
A TRE 1 2 1 2 1 2
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
FANU FANU FANU a b
ANC 4
GSM 1800
OPTIONS
Empty space,
AIR AIR no dummy panels needed
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 4 sectors :
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
Sector 3 with q TREs
Sector 4 with r TREs
AIR AIR
a b
ANC 4
GSM 1800
Empty Space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 1 2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
OPTIONS
Empty slots
AIR AIR no dummy panels needed
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 The BTS has 4 sectors :
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
Sector 3 with q TREs
Sector 4 with r TREs
AIR AIR
a b
ANC 4
GSM 1800
Empty Space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 1 2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
OPTIONS
Empty space,
no dummy panels needed
AIR AIR
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 4 sectors :
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
Sector 3 with q TREs
Sector 4 with r TREs
AIR AIR
a b
ANC 4
GSM 1800
Empty Space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 1 2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
OPTIONS
Empty space,
AIR AIR no dummy panels needed
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 4 sectors :
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
Sector 3 with q TREs
Sector 4 with r TREs
AIR AIR
a b
ANC 4
Empty Space
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 1 2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
a b a b a b
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
AIR AIR
1 2 3
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 GSM 1800
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Empty Space
AIR AIR
GSM 900
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Empty space
AIR AIR
OPTIONS
AIR
a b a b
AIR ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
S
ANC 2 U ANC 1
M
A On the 2 ANCs the bridges can be removed to get more power
at the antenna output (Low Loss)
(Operation to be performed during installation phase)
AIR
Empty space
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE 1 2 3 4 TRE 1 2 3 4
S
ANC 2 U ANC 1
M
A
AIR
Empty space
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
GSM 1800
a b
ANC 1
ANY 1 ANY 2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
TRE 1 2 3 4 56
a b
S
U ANY ANY ANC 1 ANY ANY ANC 2 ANC 2
M 2 1 4 3
A
ANY 3 ANY 4
In each sector :
If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is
required, TRE1 to TRE4 are then
cabled on ANC
Empty
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Space
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
S
ANC 3 U ANC 2
IDU 1
(Sector 1) M (Sector 2)
A TRE 1 2 1 2 1 2
AIR AIR
Empty space
no dummy panels needed
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 2 sectors.
a b a b
Sector 1 ANC 1 ANC 2
FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
TRE 1 2 1 23 4
( Sector 2 ) S ( Sector 1 ) ( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
ANC U ANC ANC ANC
4 M 1 3 2 a b a b
A
Sector 2 ANC 3 ANC 4
AIR AIR
1 2 3 4 1 2
Empty Space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU GSM 1800
AIR AIR
AIR AIR
Empty space
no dummy panels needed
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 2 sectors
Sector 1
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
TRE 1 2 1 2 3 4
( Sector 2 ) S ( Sector 1 ) ( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
U Sector 2
ANC ANC ANC ANC
4 M 1 3 2 a b a b
A ANC 3 ANC 4
AIR AIR
1 2 3 4 1 2
Empty Space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU GSM 1800
AIR AIR
AIR AIR
Empty space
no dummy panels needed
GSM 1800
AIR AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
The BTS has 2 sectors
Sector 1
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 4
FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
TRE 1 2 1 2
( Sector 1 ) S ( Sector 1 ) ( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 2 )
ANC U ANC ANC ANC Sector 2
4 M 1 3 2 a b a b
A
ANC 3 ANC 2
AIR AIR
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Empty Space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU GSM 1800
AIR AIR
1 2 1 2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
Sector 2 :
AIR AIR a b a b
ANC 3 ANC 4
ANC 4 ANC 1 ANC 3 ANC 2
S
( Sector 2 ) U ( Sector 1 ) ( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 ) 1 2 1 2
M Sector 3 :
A
a b a b
ANC 5 ANC 6
AIR AIR
1 2 1 2
GSM 900
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Empty space
AIR AIR
Capacity Mode 1 4 4 6
3 - 2/1/1 2/2/2
2 - - 3/3
Coverage Mode 1 2 2 2
TxDiv. 2Rx Div.
3 - - 1/1/1
Coverage Mode 1 2 2 2
TxDiv. 2Rx Div Low
Loss
Coverage Mode 1 2 2 2
TxDiv. 4Rx Div Low
Loss
CBO 1 2 -> 4
CBO DC 1 n.a.
GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubt,
contact Alcatel-Lucent support.
Note: Restrictions
For GSM 1900, the configuration is limited to six TREs.
123
ADAM4
P P 123
123 P
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
123
M M M
123
1 1 1 a b
2 2 2
123
ANC 1
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
For GSM 1900, the configuration is limited to six TREs over the two sectors.
1234
ADAM4
1234
P
M
P
M
1234
1234
P
M
1
2
1
2 1234
1234
1
2
The BTS has 2 sectors:
Sector 1 with n TREs
1234
Sector 2 with p TREs
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
FANU FANU FANU
The ANC can be replaced by the
AIR
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
S
ANC 2 U ANC 1 Empty space
(Sector 2) M (Sector 1)
A
Dummy panels if no modules installed
123
123
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900, or if (n+p)>6,
otherwise: dummy panel is installed
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
123
ADAM4
The BTS has 3 sectors :
123
Sector 1 with n TREs
123
P P P Sector 2 with p TREs
M M M Sector 3 with q TREs
1
2
1
2 123
123
1
2
123 a b
ANC 1
a b
ANC 2
a b
ANC 3
TRE2 TRE1
ANC 3 TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
( Sector 3 )
On each ANC:
FANU FANU FANU The bridges can be removed at installation
AIR time (on site), if maximum power is required
Empty space
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
ADAM4
123
123
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
P
M
P
M
P
M 123
123
P
M
a b
ANC 1
123
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
a b
ANC 2
9
TRE 11 10 12
FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR Both ANCs are set to the same
sector number
S
U ANY ANY ANC 1 ANC 2
M 2 1 Empty space
A
Dummy panels if no modules
installed
123
123 PM12 equipped if GSM 1900
and if n>6. Otherwise:
dummy panel is installed
1234
P P P P Sector 2 with p TREs
1234
M M M M
1 1 1 1
1234
a b
2 2 2 2
1234
ANC 1
ANY 1
TRE6 TRE5 TRE6 TRE5
TRE 1 3 2 456
a b
ANC 2
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modules
123
installed
123
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900
and if (n+p)>6. Otherwise:
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 dummy panel is installed
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
ADAM4
123
123
The BTS has 2 sectors with
respectively n and p TREs
P
M
P
M
P
M 123
123
P
M
123
1 1 1 1
a b
2 2 2 2
123
ANC 1
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 468
a b
ANC 2
FANU FANU FANU
9
AIR AIR TRE 11 10 12
S ANC 2
ANC 1
U ANY ANY (Sector 2)
2 1 (Sector 1)
M
A
Empty space
12
12
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900
and if (n+p)>6. Otherwise:
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE12 TRE11 TRE10 TRE9 dummy panel is installed
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
123
Sector 1 with n TREs
1 1 1 1 Sector 2 with p TREs
123
2 2 2 2 Sector 3 with q TREs
S
The ANC can be replaced by the
U ANC 1 ANC 2
M (Sector 1) (Sector 2) ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
A
Empty space
123
installed
1234
ADAM4
P
M
P
M 1234
1234
P
M a b a b
1234
1 1 1
2 2 2 ANC 1 ANC 2
1234
1234 TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 5 7 6 8
TRE8 TRE7 TRE4 TRE3
Both ANCs are set to the same
sector number
S
ANC 2 U ANC 1
M
A
Empty space
12
12
installed
1234
1 1 1 1 a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 4
1234
2 2 2 2
TRE 1 5 2 6 3 4
TRE 1 5 2 6 3 4
In each sector :
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Both ANCs are set to the same
AIR AIR sector number
On each ANC:
S The two bridges will be removed
at installation time (On site),
ANC 4 U ANC 1 ANC 3 ANC 2 if no more than 2 TREs are
(Sector 1) M (Sector 1) (Sector 2) (Sector 2) connected to them, and kept
A otherwise.
Empty space
1234
P P P P Sector 2 with p TREs
1234
Sector 3 with q TREs
M M M M
1234
1 1 1 1 Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
2 2 2 2
1234 a
ANC 1
b a
ANC 2
b a
ANC 5
b
a b a b a b
ANC 4 ANC 3 ANC 6
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR TRE 3 4 3 4 3 4
On each ANC:
Bridges will be removed
S at installation time (on site)
ANC 4 U ANC 1 ANC 3 ANC 2
(Sector 1) M (Sector 1) (Sector 2) (Sector 2)
A Per sector, both ANCs are set
to the same sector number
Empty space
P P P
M M M
1 1 1 a b
2 2 2
ANC 1
TRE 1 3 2 4
S
U ANC 1
M
A
Empty space
P P P
M M M
1 1 1
2 2 2
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 2 TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
AIR
Empty space
P P P
M M M
1 1 1 a b a b a b
2 2 2 ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
ANC 3
(Sector 3) On each ANC:
Bridges will be removed at installation time,
on site
S
ANC 2 U ANC 1
(Sector 2) M (Sector 1)
A
Empty space
1234
ADAM4
The BTS has 2 sectors:
1234
Sector 1 with n TREs
P P P P
1234
Sector 2 with p TREs
M M M M
1234
1 1 1 1
1234
2 2 2 2 a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
1 324 1324
AIR AIR
Dummy panels if no modules installed
123
123 PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6,
otherwise: dummy panel is installed
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Available only on AC configuration
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
123
ADAM4
P
M
P
M
P
M 123
123
P
M
The BTS has 3 sectors:
Sector 1 with n TREs
123
1 1 1 1 Sector 2 with p TREs
123
2 2 2 2 Sector 3 with q TREs
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
S
ANC 1 ANC 2
U
(Sector 1) (Sector 2)
M
A Empty space
123
123 PM12 equipped if (n+p+q)>6,
otherwise: dummy panel is installed
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Available only on AC configuration
1234
ADAM4
P P 1234
1234 P
1234
M M M
1 1 1
1234
Multiband BTS:
2 2 2
1234
1234
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Sector 1 with n TREs
Sector 2 with p TREs
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 3 2 4 TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
S
ANC 2 U ANC 1
(Sector 2) M (Sector 1)
A
Empty space
a b a b
TRE6 TRE5 ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE6 TRE5
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 2 4 56 TRE 1 3 2 4 56
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 468
a b
FANU FANU FANU ANC 2
AIR AIR
TRE 1 3 2 4
ANC 2 In sector 1:
S ANC 1 If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY
U ANY ANY (Sector 2)
2 1 (Sector 1) is required. TRE1 to 4 are then
M
A cabled on ANC
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 468
a b
FANU FANU FANU ANC 2
AIR AIR
TRE 1 3 2 4
In sector 1:
S ANC 2 If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY
ANC 1
U ANY ANY (Sector 2) is required. TRE1 to 4 are then
2 1 (Sector 1)
M cabled on ANC
A
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
Empty space
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 Available only on AC configuration
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
a b a b
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 2
S TRE 1 3 2 4 1 2
ANC 3 U ANC 1
(Sector 3) (Sector 1) ANC 4 ANC 2
M (Sector 4) (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the
A ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Empty space
a b a b
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
ANC 1 ANC 2
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 2
S
U TRE 1 3 2 4 1 2
ANC 3 ANC 1 ANC 4 ANC 2
(Sector 3) M (Sector 1) (Sector 4) (Sector 2)
A
GSM 1800
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 Empty space
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 2
FANU FANU FANU
AIR a b a b
AIR
ANC 3 ANC 4
S
ANC 3 U ANC 1
ANC 4 ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 4 1 2
(Sector 3) M (Sector 1)
(Sector 4) (Sector 2) The ANC can be replaced by the
A
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 2
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
TRE 1 3 2 1 3 2
S
ANC 3 U ANC 1 ANC 4 ANC 2 TRE 1 3 2 1 3 2
(Sector 3) M (Sector 1) (Sector 4) (Sector 2)
The ANC can be replaced by the
A ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
FANU FANU FANU
a b a b a b
ANC 4 ANC 5 ANC 6
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
TRE 1 2 1 2 1 2
On each ANC:
S Bridges will be removed
ANC 3 U ANC 1 ANC 4 ANC 2 at installation time (on site)
(Sector 3) M (Sector 1) (Sector 4) (Sector 2)
A The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
1234
ADAM4
P P 1234
1234
P
1234
M M M
1 1 1
2 2
1234
1234
2
Multiband Cell:
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
AIR
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
S
ANC 2 U ANC 1
M
A
GSM 1800
Empty space
ANY 1 ANY 2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
TRE 1 3 2 4 56 TRE 1 3 2 4 56
S On each ANC:
U ANY
If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is
ANY ANC 1 ANC 2
M 1 2 required, TRE1 to TRE4 are then
A cabled on ANC
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
GSM 1800
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
a b
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 ANC 1
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 468
TRE 1 3 2 4
S On ANC1:
U ANY ANY ANC1 ANC 2
2 1 If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY
M
A is required. TRE1 to 4 are then
cabled on ANC
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
GSM 1800
a b
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5 ANC 1
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 468
TRE 1 3 2 4
S On ANC1:
U ANY ANY ANC1 ANC 2 If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY
M 2 1 is required. TRE1 to 4 are then
A
cabled on ANC
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
GSM 1800
Dummy panels if no modules
installed
Empty space
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
Sector 2:
q TREs in GSM 1800 band
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 r TREs in GSM 900 band
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
Sector 2:
q TREs in GSM 1800 band
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3 r TREs in GSM 900 band
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
GSM 1800
Dummy panels if no modules
installed
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 2
a b a b
ANC 1 ANC 3
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 24
Sector 2:
q TREs in GSM 900 band
r TREs in GSM 1800 band
FANU FANU FANU
AIR AIR
a b a b
S ANC 2 ANC 4
ANC 3 U ANC 1
(Sector 1) (Sector 1) ANC 4 ANC 2
M (Sector 2) (Sector 2) TRE 1 2 1 2
A
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
GSM 1800
a b a b a b
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
ANC 6 ANC 5
(Sector 3) (Sector 3)
TRE 1 2 1 2 1 2
Sector 2 Sector 3
1 2
S TRE 1 2 1 2
ANC 3 U ANC 1 ANC 4 ANC 2
M On each ANC:
(Sector 2) (Sector 1) (Sector 2) (Sector 1)
A Bridges will be removed
at installation time (on site)
The ANC can be replaced by the
ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
GSM 1800
Dummy panels if no modules
installed
Empty space
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubt,
contact Alcatel-Lucent support.
1234
P P P P Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
1234
M M M M
1 1 1 1
1234
2 2 2 2 a b a b a b
1234
ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 6
TRE 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2
TRE2 TRE1 TRE3 TRE1
ANC 6 ANC 5 Sector 4 Sector 5 Sector 6
(Sector 6) (Sector 5)
a b a b a b
ANC 3 ANC 4 ANC 5
GSM 850
123
123
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900,
and if TREs (n+p+t)>3. Otherwise:
TRE1 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 TRE1 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1 dummy panel is installed
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU Available only on AC configuration
1234
P P P P Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
1234
M M M M
1 1 1 1
1234
2 2 2 2 a b a b a b
1234
ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 6
TRE 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2
TRE2 TRE1 TRE3 TRE1
ANC 6 ANC 5
(Sector 3) (Sector 3)
a b a b a b
ANC 3 ANC 4 ANC 5
Empty space
MBO1 1 8 -> 12
MBO1T
2 4/4 ->4/6(6/6*)
MBO2 1 12 -> 16
The following figure shows the MBO1E - 3 sectors with 3 TRE in one sector.
MBO1E 1 8 -> 12
2 4/4 ->4/6(6/6*)
MBO2E 1 n.a.
Capacity Mode 1 8 8
2 6/6 8/8
3 4/4/4 8/8/8
4 2/2/2/2 6/6/6/6
2 6/6 12/12
3 - 8/8/8
3 - 4/4/4 + 4/4/4
3 2/2/2 4/4/4
3 - 2/2/2
3 - 2/2/2
One TRM for one TRE, and one TRX in Tx Div mode.
TRX 1a
TRM TRX 1
TRX 1b
is equivalent with
or
is equivalent with
is equivalent with
is equivalent with
is equivalent with
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus
p and r TRX in 1800 MHz
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in
1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plus
p and r TRX in 1800 MHz
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in
1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n,q,s TRX in 900 MHz plus p,r,t
TRX in 1800 MHz
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in
1800 MHz plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1
sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz
3 Indoor Cabinets
This chapter describes the indoor cabinets used in 9100 BTS configurations.
3.1 CIMI/CIDI
The CIMI and CIDI are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectional
and sectorized configurations. The following figure shows the position of
the main modules.
CIMI CIDI
Top FANUs
Interconnection Panel Interconnection Panel
STASR 2 STASR 2
STASR 1 STASR 1
FANUs FANUs
Air Inlet Air Inlet
Perforated RF Interface
Cover contains
FANUs
(CIMI only). Equipment Label
Interconnection Area
Subrack
EMC Gasket
(CIMI only)
Adjustable Feet
3.1.1.1 Construction
The CIMI/CIDI is a steel box construction with four adjustable feet, on its
underside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinet has
no side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the top
of the cabinet.
The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment comply
with IEC 297 standards.
3.1.1.2 Door
The CIMI/CIDI can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.
Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the front
of the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet. In the CIMI, the door is
fitted with a copper-beryllium gasket to ensure EMC integrity when closed. An
optional dust filter can be fitted to the CIDI door. The filter is removable for
cleaning.
3.1.1.3 Cables
All external cables, except for the antenna, are connected to the interconnection
panel. The external cables include the DC supply and Abis connections. The
antenna cabling is connected at the top of the cabinet.
A ribbon cable is used in the cabinet to link the subracks together; as shown in
the following figure. In the CIMI, the top end of the cable terminates on the
TFBP (refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.1.3) ). In the CIDI, the cable terminates
at the rear connector of the top subrack. The bottom end terminates on the
BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) ).
TFBP Subrack
(CIMI
only)
Rear Front
BTSRI
Ground Bolt
Antenna
Antenna
Front Connectors
Connectors
3.1.1.5 Cooling
The CIMI is air cooled by fans, both inside the cabinet and at the top. Cool air is
drawn in through perforations on the door and is then forced up, through the
subracks, by the internal fans. The warm air is expelled through perforations at
the top of the cabinet.
The CIDI is cooled by fans inside the cabinet only; it does not require top
fans. Refer to Temperature Control (Section 11) for information about the
cooling system hardware.
XBCB
XGPS
XRT
Abis 4 Abis 3 Abis 2 Abis 1
XCLK1 Out
XCLK1 In
For details
see below
XCLK2 In/Out
XGND
GND
48V 0V
48V 0V
I I I
I I I
0 0 0
BTS S S 0 0 0
INT R R INT SR1 SR2
1 2
Circuit Circuit
Breakers Breakers
The interconnection area (BTSCA) is located on the left-hand side (see Figure
182 ); the shaded areas identify separate groups of connectors. The power
supply input-connectors and circuit breakers are located on the right-hand side.
All interfaces are overvoltage protected.
An External Input/Output Board is located behind the interconnection area. The
XIOB is connected to the interconnection area and contains a 24 V DC/DC
converter and interface circuitry for external alarms.
The interconnection panel provides interfaces for the:
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
XI6
XI4
XI7
XI8
XI2
XI3
XI5
XI1
XIO 1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
XI16
XI14
XI10
XI12
XI13
XI15
XI11
XI9
External XIO 2
Alarm
Inputs
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
XI17
XI24
XI18
XI19
XI20
XI22
XI23
XI21
XIO 3
X GND
X GND
X GND
X GND
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
X06
X04
X07
X08
X02
X03
X05
X01
External
Alarm
Outputs XIO 4
1 1 9 No Outside
2 2 9 Yes Outside
3 3 9 No Outside
4 4 9 No Outside
5 5 9 No Outside
6 6 9 No Outside
7 7 9 No Outside
8 8 9 Yes Outside
9 9 9 Yes Outside
10 10 9 Yes Outside
11 11 9 Yes Outside
12 12 9 Yes Outside
13 13 9 Yes Outside
14 14 9 Yes Outside
15 15 9 Yes Outside
16 16 9 Yes Outside
17 17 9 Yes Outside
18 18 9 Yes Outside
19 19 9 Yes Outside
20 20 9 Yes Outside
21 21 9 Yes Outside
22 22 9 Yes Outside
23 23 9 Yes Outside
24 24 9 Yes Outside
RI
Power supply status
Battery status
XRT The XRT connector provides access to the 9100 BTS via an
asynchronous serial interface. The signal levels conform to
CCITT V.24. This allows a standard terminal to be used for
radio supervision and loop-test purposes. The data rate is
programmable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. The XRT
Interface is controlled by the SUM.
XCLK The XCLK connectors are used to synchronize the 9100 BTS to
another BTS, which can be a G1 BTS, a G2 BTS or a 9100 BTS.
The signaling interface conforms to RS-422. The XCLK1 In and
XCLK1 Out are connected together, pin-to-pin. The XCLK2
In/Out connector provides a bi-directional clock interface. The
XCLK Interface is controlled by the SUM.
Krone Strip Connector When the Krone connector is used for Abis
connection, depending on the cable impedance,
take into account the following remarks:
Abis Relays Four relays, one for each Abis Interface, are
controlled by the SUM. The relays can be used
to:
Circuit
Breakers
2 1
5A
XIOB
Top Fan
Backplane
(CIMI only)
25 A
STASR2
25 A
STASR1
A filtered 0 V return
A ground connector
A circuit breaker.
The XIOB and TFBP have the same inputs as the subracks.
The following table shows the rated values for the power components.
Item Component/Rating
Circuit Breaker 3 5A
The CIMI/CIDI is EMC protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinet
level, the CIMI/CIDI is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of
the cabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to
the subracks via the cabinet bus bar. A functionally identical alternative to the
cabinet bus bar is used in later models of CIMI. This is a branched cableform.
The CIDI uses a bus bar for this purpose.
The bus bar (or cableform) also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks and
other CIMI/CIDI equipment.
BTSRIMI The BTSRIMI is a flat cable and Printed Circuit Board. It interconnects 3BK 07720
the subrack backplanes (and the TFBP in case of CIMI). A BTSRI
board is permanently attached to one end of the cable.
BUMI The BUMI is a branched cableform. It contains cables for the DC 3BK 07763
power connections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.
CA-ADCO Cable Assembly - Alarm Disable Connector disables eight alarm 3BK 07953
inputs. It connects to an XIO connector on the Interconnection Panel.
CIMI bus bar The CIMI bus bar is a hardware module used for the DC power 3BK 07763
connections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.
CS02 Cable Set 02 is an Antenna Network cable set. It connects an ANY to 3BK 07598
another ANY or to an ANX/ANC.
CS03 Cable Set 03 is a TRE cable set which connects a TRE to an 3BK 07599
ANX/ANC or ANY.
CS04 Cable Set 04 is an Antenna cable set. It connects an ANX/ANC to 3BK 07600
two antenna cabinet connectors.
CS05 Cable Set 05 is the BTS Connection Area to SUM cable set. In 3BK 07199
a CIMI it interconnects the SUM and the Interconnection Panel.
The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, and clock and
control signals to and from the SUM.
CS04 ANIC The Antenna Indoor Cable provides a duplex 3BK 07921 2
connection between the ANX/ANC and a
cabinet antenna connector.
CA01 Cable Assembly 01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and 3BK 07594
Abis2 connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel and
the customers 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01328
The cable used is L907, an 8 pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM 0004
cable.
CA02 Cable Assembly 02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and 3BK 07595
Abis2 connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel and
the customers 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 00110
The cable used is Flex3, a multi-coaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable. 0011
A shorting plug, SP2M is used with Flex3, for impedance matching. 3BK 08949
CA-CBTE The Cable Assembly - Cable BTS Terminal is the BTS Terminal 3BK 07951
cable. It connects the BTS Terminal to the BTS Terminal connector
on the SUM.
CA-GC35 The Cable Assembly - Ground Cable 35 mm sq. is the cabinet ground 3BK 08031
cable. It connects to the M8 ground bolt on the cabinet, and to the
customers ground point.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01723
The cable used is a 35 mm sq., yellow/green power cable. 0003
CA-PC2W16 Cable Assembly - Power Cable Two Wires 16 mm sq. is a -48/ 0 3BK 08029
VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the DC connectors on the
Interconnection Panel, and to the customers DC power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 00147
The cables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq. 0001 (Blue)
black power cable.
1AC 00147
0002 (Black)
CA-PC35BK Cable Assembly - Power Cable 35 mm sq. Black is a 0 VDC 3BK 08030
cabinet power cable. It connects to the 0 VDC connector on the
Interconnection Panel, and to the customers 0 VDC power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01723
The cable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable. 0001
CA- PC35BL Cable Assembly - Power Cable 35 mm sq. Blue is a -48 VDC 3BK 08032
cabinet power cable. It connects to the -48 VDC connector on the
Interconnection Panel, and to the customers -48 VDC power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01723
The cable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable. 0002
External Alarms This cable can be made onsite to the desired length. The cable used 1AC 01328
is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable. 0001
SCM1/3 Synchronization Cable Mark 1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It 3BK 08102
connects a G1 BTS Mark1 to the 9100 BTS.
SCM2/3 Synchronization Cable Mark 2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It 3BK 08103
connects a G1 BTS Mark2 to the 9100 BTS.
CA01/02
CAADCO
TFBP
BTSCA DC
(CIMI only)
CS05
BTSRIMI
CACBTE
STASR 2
Backplane
SUM
STASR 1
Backplane
BTSRI
3.2 CIMA/CIDE
The CIMA/CIDE are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectional
and sectorized configurations. There are two variants, where the allowed
configurations are determined by the type of external power supply used
by the cabinet:
The following figure shows the position of the main modules for both variants.
DC variant AC variant
FANUs
FANUs
FANUs Air Inlet FANUs
Air Inlet Air Inlet Air Inlet
STASR 4
STASR 4 STASR 3 STASR 3
Up to 2 ANCs and
ANs up to 2 Microwave Up to 2 ANCs and
Modules Up to 4 TREs or up to 2 Microwave
ANs Modules
Dummy Panel
Dummy Panel FANUs
STASR 3 Dummy Panel
STASR 3 Air Inlet
STASR 2
STASR 2
Up to 4 TREs
Up to 4 TREs
SUM and ANs Up to 4 TREs
FANUs
FANUs
Air Inlet FANUs
Air Inlet Dummy Panel
Air Inlet
STASR 2 STASR 2 STASR 1
STASR 1
SUM and ANs SUM, ANYs
and ANCs Up to 4 TREs ADAM, 3 PM12s,
SUM, ANC
* ) If TREs are installed FANUs are installed under this STASR instead of over it.
RF Interface RF Interface
Equipment Label
Interconnection Area
EMC Gasket
(CIMA only)
STASR
Note that the AC
variant may replace
the bottom STASR with
a battery tray
containing BU41 or
BU100.
Adjustable Feet
3.2.3.1 Construction
The CIMA/CIDE is a steel box construction with four adjustable feet, on its
underside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinet has
no side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the top
of the cabinet.
The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment comply
with IEC 297 standards.
3.2.3.2 Door
The CIMA/CIDE can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.
Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the front
of the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet and, in the CIMA, is
fitted with a copper-beryllium gasket to ensure EMC integrity when closed.
3.2.3.3 Cables
All external cables, except for the antenna, are connected to the interconnection
panel. The external cables include the AC or DC supply and Abis connections.
The antenna cabling is connected at the top of the cabinet.
A ribbon cable is used within the cabinet to link the subracks together; see
the following figure. The top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (CIMA
only - refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.1.3) for more information). The bottom
end terminates on the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5)
for more information). If an internal battery is used in the AC Variant, the
ribbon cable also connects to the RIBAT (refer to RIBAT (Section 12.29) for
more information).
Subrack
Rear Front Rear Subrack Front
Subrack Subrack
Sub
Subrack rack or
Battery
BTSRI BTSRI Tray
RIBAT in Case of
Battery (CIDE
DC variant only) AC variant
Ground Bolt
Antenna Antenna
Connectors Front Connectors
The following figure is a top view of the CIDE. The CIDE has no top fans,
just a perforated top cover.
Top Cover
AC Mains
Filter Ground Bolt
Terminals
Antenna
Connectors Antenna
Front Connectors
3.2.3.5 Cooling
The CIMA/CIDE is air cooled by fans, inside the cabinet and, in the CIMA,
additionally at the top. Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door and
is then forced up, through the subracks, by the internal fans. The warm air is
expelled through perforations at the top of the cabinet by the top fans. Refer to
Temperature Control (Section 11) for details of the cooling system hardware.
XGPS
XRT
For details
see below
XCLK2 In/Out
XGND
GND
48V 0V DC OUT
DC OUT 200 W max
48V 0V 48 V/200 W max
+ L
EXT. 0V
I
BATTERY EXTERN DC
I I I I I I _
48V I I I I I I
0 0 0 0 0 0
BTS S S S S S 0 0 0 0 0 0
INT R R R R R INT & SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4 SR5
1 2 3 4 5 N DC OUT
EUC output alarms connected to BTS inputs: Sixteen free configurable ESD
protected alarm inputs are available in BTS. Connection by cage terminals.
The EUC alarm cable must be routed via bracket in rack top.
Vc
External alarm trigger BTS alarm input
R
1 mA
R
or
XIO Interface The XIO connectors allow various external alarm devices to be
connected to the 9100 BTS. These include smoke and flood
detectors, as well as electro-mechanical switches. Crimped or
clamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors. Figure
191 shows the positions of the XIO connectors.
Figure 183 provides a detailed view of the XIO connectors.
Table 8 describes the XIO connectors, in functional groups.
Table 9 gives a detailed view of the eternal alarm inputs.
External Clock Interface The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of
functions; see Figure 191 . Table 10 describes the connectors.
Abis Interface The Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions;
see Figure 191 . The interface consists of the connectors described
in Table 11 .
6 5 4 3 2 1
5A
XIOB
Top Fan
Backplane
(CIMA only)
STASR 5 25 A
STASR 4 25 A
STASR 3 25 A
STASR 2 25 A
STASR 1 25 A
A filtered 0 V return
A ground connector
A circuit breaker.
The XIOB and TFBP (CIMA only) have the same inputs as the subracks.
The following table shows the rated values for the power components.
Item Component/Rating
Circuit Breakers 1 - 5 25 A
Circuit Breaker 6 5A
ACRI BCB
PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
Shunt
DC Bus
S
APOD h
Ground u
(M8 Bolt) n
Circuit t
Breakers
6 5 4 3 2 1
0 VDC
(M6 Bolt)
5A 5A
AFIP
XIOB
*
External
Battery
Top Fan
Backplane
*
STASR 4 25 A BU41
or
BU100
STASR 3 25 A 0 VDC
48 VDC
External
STASR 2 25 A 48 VDC
200 W
STASR 1 25 A
*
Only one battery possible
The AC input is 230 VAC 1. The AC input is connected to the AFIP, where
it is filtered and passed to the APOD. The APOD is located in the ASIB and
contains an AC circuit breaker used to isolate the AC input supply.
The ASIB contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to APOD (Section 12.11) and
PM08 (Section 12.12) for detailed descriptions of the APOD and the
PM08s, respectively. Up to five PM08s are used in the CIMA; these are
PM08/5 to PM08/1
Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Refer
to BCU1 (Section 12.16) , ABAC (Section 12.20) , BU41 (Section 12.24) ,
BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions of BCU1 and the ABAC, and
the optional items BU41 and BU100, respectively.
AC In AC
put Filter OMU
ADAM
0 VDC 48 VDC
0 VDC
(M6 Bolt)
Ground
(M8 Bolt)
10 A
XIOB
25 A
STASR 5
STASR 4 25 A
STASR 3 25 A
STASR 2 25 A
STASR 1 25 A
The AC input is 230 VAC 1. The AC input is connected to the AC Filter, where
it is filtered and passed to three PM12s. The mains power connection to
each PM12 is via a flying socket.
The three PM12s convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section
12.14) for a description of the PM12. Up to three PM12s are used in a CIDE;
these are PM12/3 to PM12/1.
Control of the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing is
provided by the OMU via the BCB. Charge/discharge current is monitored via a
shunt in the ADAM. The ADAM acts as an interface between the PM12s, the
batteries and the power distribution inside the BTS. Refer to ADAM (Section
12.21) for a detailed description of the ADAM and for a functional description of
the power supply system.
DC power is distributed in the BTS via DCBREAK and the bus bar. DCBREAK
contains six circuit breakers, five for STASRs 1 - 5, and one for the XIOB.
The CIDE is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinet
level, the CIDE is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the
cabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to the
subracks via a bus bar system. The cables are terminated with FASTON,
Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.
ADABA ADABA connects the battery via breakers to ADAM. It includes a cable 3BK 25146
for the battery temperature sensor.
ADABM ADABM connects the -48 VDC filter to ADAM or the interconnection area. 3BK 25139
BTSRIMA The CIMA BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MEDI is a flat 3BK 07720
cable and a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP.
A BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.
BUMA The Cable Assembly Maxi as used in the later variant of CIMA is a 3BK 07762
branched cableform. It contains cables for the DC power connections to
the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.
CA-ADCO The CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. It connects to an XIO 3BK 07953
connector on the Interconnection Panel.
CIMA bus bar The CIMA bus bar is a hardware module used for the DC power 3BK 07762
connections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.
CS02 CS02 is an AN cable set. It connects an ANY to another ANY or to 3BK 07598
an ANX or ANC.
CS04 CS04 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANX or ANC to two antenna 3BK 07600
cabinet connectors.
CS05 CS05 is the BTSCA-to-SUM cable set. In a CIMA, it interconnects the 3BK 07199
SUM and the Interconnection Panel. The cable set carries the Abis1 and
Abis2 Interfaces, and clock and control signals to and from the SUM.
CA-PCAN CA-PCAN connects the -48 VDC filter (on DCBREAK) to ADAM or to 3BK 25115
the interconnection area.
CA-PCAP CA-PCAP connects the 0 VDC filter (on DCBREAK) to ADAM or to the 3BK 25114
interconnection area.
ADABA CA-ADABM CA-ADABM connects -48 VDC from ADAM 3BK 25139 1
to the battery breaker.
CS05 CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces 3BK 07922 1
from the Interconnection Panel to the SUM.
AC Supply This AC power supply cable can be made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 00170
The cable used is a single pair, 4 mm sq. power cable. 0012
CA01 CA01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 3BK 07594
connections between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel and the
customers 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01328
The cable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable. 0004
CA02 CA02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections 3BK 07595
between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel and the customers 2
Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 00110
The cable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable. 0011
A shorting plug, SP2M is used with Flex3, for impedance matching. 3BK 08949
CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminal to 3BK 07951
the BTS Terminal connector on the SUM.
CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 ground 3BK 08031
bolt on the cabinet, and to the customers ground point.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01723
The cable used is a 35 mm sq. yellow/green power cable. 0003
CA-PC2W16 CA PC2W16 is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the 3BK 08029
DC connectors on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customers DC
power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 00147
The cables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq. 0001 (Blue)
black power cable.
1AC 00147
0002 (Black)
CA-PC35BK CA PC35BK is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the 0 VDC 3BK 08030
connector on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customers 0 VDC
power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01723
The cable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable. 0001
CA -PC35BL CA PC35BL is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the -48 3BK 08032
VDC connector on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customers -48
VDC power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01723
The cable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable. 0002
External This cable can be made onsite to the desired length. The cable used is 1AC 01328
Alarms L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable. 0001
SCG2/3 SCG2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G2 BTS to the 3BK 08101
9100 BTS.
SCG3 SCG3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a 9100 BTS to 3BK 07950
another 9100 BTS.
SCM1/3 SCM1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 3BK 08102
1 to the 9100 BTS.
SCM2/3 SCM2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 3BK 08103
2 to the 9100 BTS.
TFBP
(CIMA only)
STASR 5
Backplane
CA GC35, CA PC2W16, CA PC35BK,
CA PC35BL
CA01/02
STASR 4
SCG2/3, SCG3, SCM1/3, SCM2/3 Backplane
CAADCO
BTSCA DC
STASR 3
CS05 Backplane
CACBTE
STASR 2
Backplane
SUM
STASR 1
Backplane
BTSRIMA
BTSRI
The following figure shows the position of the main modules for both variants.
Top FANUs Top FANUs Top FANUs
Connector Area Connector Area Connector Area
STASR 5 STASR 5 STASR 5
Top FANUs
Connector Area Dummy Panel Dummy Panel Dummy Panel
STASR 3 STASR 3 STASR 3 STASR 3
DC: SUM, ANYs, ANCs SUM, ANYs ADAM, 3 PM12s, ADAM, 3 PM12s,
and ANCs SUM, ANC SUM, ANC
AC: SUM, ANCs
BATS (option)
MBI3 AC or DC Variant MBI5 DC Variant MBI5 AC Variant with or w/o BATS MBI5 AC Variant with large BBU
If an internal battery is used, the MBI3 holds two and the MBI5 holds four
STASRs. STASR1 contains the SUM, three PM12s and the ADAM. STASR2
and 4 each contain up to four TREs. STASR3 contains up to two ANCs, and
optionally, up to two microwave communications modules
If an external battery is used, the MBI3 hold three and the MBI5 holds
five STASRs. The battery tray at the bottom of the MBI is replaced by a
STASR which contains up to four additional TREs. In this case, FANUs
are installed under this STASR.
STASR
Adjustable Feet
EMC Gasket
STASR
Adjustable Feet
3.3.3.3 Construction
The MBI3/MBI5 are steel box constructions with four adjustable feet on the
underside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinets
have no side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the
top of the cabinets.
The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment comply
with IEC 297 standards.
3.3.3.4 Door
The MBI3/MBI5 can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.
Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the front
of the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet.
3.3.3.5 Cables
All external cables, except for the antenna and AC supply, are connected to
the interconnection panel. The external cables include DC supply and Abis
connections. The antenna cabling and AC supply are connected at the top
of the cabinet.
A ribbon cable is used within the cabinet to link the subracks together; see the
following figure. The top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (refer to Top
Fan Unit (Section 11.1.3) for more information). The bottom end terminates on
the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) for more information).
If an internal battery is used in the AC variant, the ribbon cable also connects to
the RIBAT (refer to RIBAT (Section 12.29) for more information).
MBI5
DC variant AC variant
TFBP
Subrack Subrack
MBI3
Subrack
or
Subrack Subrack Subrack Battery
Tray
BTSRI
Antenna Antenna
labelling labelling
on the roof on the roof
Q ANT A N ANT A
Q ANT B N ANT B
R ANT A
Auxiliary3 x N
(*) R ANT B antenna blocks
(microwave)
P ANT A P ANT B
Antenna External Input Board Multistandard BTS Connection Area Blind Power Supply and Hole for SMA
Connectors XIBM MSCA Plate Circuit Breaker Area connector GPS
3.3.3.7 Cooling
The MBIs are air cooled by fans, inside the cabinet and additionally at the top.
Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door and is then forced up,
through the subracks, by the internal fans. The warm air is expelled through
perforations at the top of the cabinet by the top fans. Refer to Temperature
Control (Section 11) for more information about the cooling system hardware.
Equipment Labels External Interface DC Output External Clock Equipment DC Filter DC Output *
Connectors Interface Group Abis Interface Group Labels Connectors 48 V/500 W max
GND 48V 0V
XCLK1 Out
DC OUT
XCLK1 In
+12 V Abis 3 Abis 1 500 W max
Abis 4 Abis 2
Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1
XCLK2 In/Out
I I I I
XBCB
0 0 0 0
INT & SR1 SR2 SR3
DC OUT
XRT RS232
* : From DCBR3 variant 3BK 25977 ACxx the DC Out connector was removed
Figure 202: MBI3 Interconnection Panels
External Alarm Input Board Multistandard Multistandard Connection Area Power Supply and
XIBM MSCA Circuit Breaker Area
DCBR5
Equipment Labels External Interface Connectors External Clock Equipment DC Filter DC Output *
DC Output Interface Group Abis Interface Group Labels Connectors 48 V/500 W max
Abis 4 Abis 2
Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1
XCLK2 In/Out
I I I I I I
XBCB
0 0 0 0 0 0
INT & SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4 SR5
DC OUT
XRT RS232
* : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed
Figure 203: MBI5 Interconnection Panels
The External Alarm Input Board Multistandard XIBM is located on the left-hand
side of the interconnection area (see Figures 202 and 203 ), followed by the
Multistandard Interconnection Area MSCA in the middle. An extension area
is covered with a blind plate. The power supply input/output connectors and
circuit breakers are located on DCBR3/DCBR5 on the right-hand side.
The XIBM contains a 12 V DC/DC converter and interface circuitry for external
alarms on the back side of the panel.
The interconnection panels provide interfaces for:
Signals
External alarms
External clock
Abis.
DC Power supplies.
EUC output alarms connected to BTS inputs: Sixteen free configurable ESD
protected alarm inputs are available in BTS. Connection by cage terminals.
The EUC alarm cable must be routed via bracket in rack top.
Vc
External alarm trigger BTS alarm input
R
1 mA
R
or
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
XI6
XI4
XI7
XI8
XI2
XI3
XI5
XI1
XI 1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
XI16
XI14
XI10
XI12
XI13
XI15
XI11
XI9
XI 2
XRT The XRT connector provides access to the 9100 BTS via an
asynchronous serial interface. The signal levels conform to
CCITT V.24. This allows a standard terminal to be used for
radio supervision and loop-test purposes. The data rate is
programmable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. Only transmit
and receive lines are used. Hardware flow control is not
implemented. Drivers and control of the XRT interface are
located on the SUMA.
XCLK The XCLK connectors are used to synchronize the 9100 BTS
to another BTS (G1 BTS, G2 BTS, 9100 BTS) in time and
frequency or vice versa. The signaling interface conforms to
RS-422.
There are three XCLK connectors:
XCLK1IN: input
XCLK1OUT: output
XCLK2IN/OUT: bi-directional interface.
The input XCLK1IN and the output XCLK1OUT are connected
together, pin-to-pin. The XCLK2IN/OUT connector provides a
bi-directional clock interface. Bus drivers and control logic are
located on the SUMA.
Abis Relays Four relays, one for each Abis Interface, are
controlled by the SUMA.
The relays can be used to:
DCBR3
0 VDC 48/60 VDC
Filter Filter
Clamp Panel
(not on
DCBR3)
Circuit Breakers
XIBM
Top Fan 15 A
Backplane
30 A
STASR3
30 A
STASR2
30 A
STASR1
BUS Bar BUS Bar
* : From DCBR3 variant 3BK 25977 ACxx the DC Out connector was removed
Figure 206: MBI3 DC Power Interconnections
Ground DC Input * DC Output DC Input
(M8 Bolt) 0V 48 V / 500 W max 48 V
DCBR5
0 VDC 48/60 VDC
Filter Filter
Clamp Panel
(not on DCBR5)
Circuit
Breakers
XIBM
15 A
Top Fan
Backplane
30 A
STASR 5
30 A
STASR 4
30 A
STASR 3
30 A
STASR 2
30 A
STASR 1
BUS Bar BUS Bar
* : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed
Figure 207: MBI5 DC Power Interconnections
A filtered 0 V return
A ground connector
A circuit breaker.
The XIBM and TFBP have the same inputs as the subracks.
The following table shows the rated values for the power components.
Items Component/Rating
The MBIs are EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinet
level, the MBIs are connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the
cabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to the
subracks via the cabinet bus bar.
The bus bar also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks and other MBI
equipment.
AC AC
Filter OMU
I nput
ADAM
0 VDC 48 VDC
Ground
(M8 Bolt) DC Output *
DCBR5
0 VDC 48V/60 VDC
Filter Filter
Circuit
Breakers
XIBM
15 A
Top Fan
Backplane
30 A
STASR 5
30 A
STASR 4
30 A
STASR 3
30 A
STASR 2
30 A
STASR 1
BUS Bar BUS Bar
* : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed
Figure 208: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System w/o Battery
AC AC
Filter OMU
I nput
Back
panel
ADAM
LOAD BATT
Front
side 0 VDC 48 VDC 48 VDC
Ground Battery
(M8 Bolt) DC Output * Breakers
DCBR5
0 VDC 48V/60 VDC Optional internal
Filter Filter Battery Unit
+
Battery RIBAT
Circuit
Breakers
to BCB
XIBM
15 A
Top Fan
Backplane
30 A
STASR 5
30 A
STASR 4
30 A
STASR 3
30 A
STASR 2
30 A
STASR 1
BUS Bar BUS Bar
* : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed
Figure 209: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System with Internal Battery
AC AC
Filter OMU
I nput
Back
panel
ADAM
LOAD BATT
Front
side 0 VDC 48 VDC 48 VDC
Ground
(M8 Bolt)
DC Output * Battery
Breakers
DCBR5
0 VDC 48V/60 VDC GND
Filter Filter
Optional external
Battery Unit
+
Battery RIBAT
Circuit
Breakers
XBCB
XIBM
15 A
Top Fan
Backplane
30 A
STASR 5
30 A
STASR 4
30 A
STASR 3
30 A
STASR 2
30 A
STASR 1
BUS Bar BUS Bar
* : From DCBR5 variant 3BK 25978 ADxx the DC Out connector was removed
Figure 210: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System with External Battery
The AC input is 230 VAC. The AC input is connected to the AC filter, where
it is filtered and passed to three PM12s. The mains power connection to
each PM12 is via a flying socket.
The three PM12s convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section
12.14) for a description of the PM12. Up to three PM12s are used in a MBI;
these are PM12/1 to PM12/3.
Control of the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing is
provided by the OMU via the BCB. Charge/discharge current is monitored
via a shunt in the ADAM. The ADAM acts as an interface between PM12s,
batteries and power distribution inside the BTS. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21)
for a detailed description of the ADAM and for a functional description of
the power supply system.
In the MBI3, DC power is distributed in the BTS via the DCBR3 and the bus
bar. The DCBR3 contains four circuit breakers, three for STASRs 1 - 3 and
one for the XIBM and top fan unit.
In the MBI5, DC power is distributed in the BTS via the DCBR5 and the bus
bar. The DCBR5 contains six circuit breakers, five for STASRs 1 - 5 and
one for the XIBM and top fan unit.
The MBIs are EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinet
level, the MBIs are connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of the
cabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to the
subracks via a bus bar system. The cables are terminated with FASTON,
Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.
ADABA ADABA connects the battery via breakers to ADAM. It includes a cable 3BK 25146
for the battery temperature sensor.
ADABM ADABM connects the -48 VDC filter to a clamp panel. In combination 3BK 25139
with CA-PCAN, it connects to the circuit breakers of DCBR3/DCBR5.
BTSRI3 The BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MBI3 is a flat cable 3BK 025973
and a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. A
BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.
BTSRI5 The BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MBI5 is a flat cable 3BK 025974
and a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. A
BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.
CA-ADCO The CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. It connects to an XIO 3BK 07953
connector on the Interconnection Panel.
CABATS CABATS connects the small battery unit BATS to ADAM. 3BK 25873
CA-PCAN CA-PCAN connects the ADAM or the -48 VDC filter (on 3BK 25115
DCBR3/DCBR5) to the DC breakers on DCBR3/DCBR5.
CA-PCAP CA-PCAP connects the 0 VDC filter (on DCBR3/DCBR5) to ADAM. 3BK 25114
CS02 CS02 is an AN cable set. It connects an ANY to another ANY or to 3BK 07598
an ANC.
CS04 CS04 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANC to two antenna cabinet 3BK 07600
connectors.
CS05 CS05 is the MSCA-to-SUM cable set. It interconnects the SUM and 3BK 07199
the MSCA. The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, and
clock and control signals to and from the SUM.
ADABA CA-ADABM CA-ADABM connects -48 VDC from ADAM 3BK 25139 1
to the battery breaker.
CS05 CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces 3BK 07922 1
from the MSCA to the SUM.
AC Supply This AC power supply cable can be made onsite to the desired length. The 1AC 00170
cable used is a single-pair, 4 mm sq. power cable. 0012
CA01 CA01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections 3BK 07594
between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel MSCA and the customers 2
Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. The 1AC 01328
cable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable. 0004
CA02 CA02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connections 3BK 07595
between the 9100 BTS Interconnection Panel MSCA and the customers 2
Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. The 1AC 00110
cable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable. 0011
A shorting plug, SP2M is used with Flex3, for impedance matching. 3BK 08949
CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminal to the 3BK 07951
BTS Terminal connector on the SUM.
CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 ground bolt on 3BK 08031
the cabinet, and to the customers ground point.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. The 1AC 01723
cable used is a 35 mm sq. yellow/green power cable. 0003
CA- CA PC2W16 is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the DC 3BK 08029
PC2W16 connectors on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customers DC power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. The 1AC 00147
cables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq. black 0001 (Blue)
power cable.
1AC 00147
0002 (Black)
CA-PC35BK CA PC35BK is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the 0 VDC connector 3BK 08030
on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customers 0 VDC power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. The 1AC 01723
cable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable. 0001
CA CA PC35BL is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the -48 VDC 3BK 08032
-PC35BL connector on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customers -48 VDC power source.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. The 1AC 01723
cable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable. 0002
External This cable can be made onsite to the desired length. The cable used is L907, 1AC 01328
Alarms an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable. 0001
SCG2/3 SCG2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G2 BTS to the 9100 3BK 08101
BTS.
SCG3 SCG3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a 9100 BTS to another 3BK 07950
9100 BTS.
SCM1/3 SCM1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 1 to 3BK 08102
the 9100 BTS.
SCM2/3 SCM2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 2 to 3BK 08103
the 9100 BTS.
CA01/02
TFBP
CAADCO BTSRI3
XIBM/MSCA DC
STASR 3
CS05 Backplane
CACBTE
STASR 2
Backplane
SUM
STASR 1
Backplane
BTSRI
TFBP
STASR 5
Backplane
CA GC35, CA PC2W16, CA PC35BK,
CA PC35BL
CA01/02
STASR 4
SCG2/3, SCG3, SCM1/3, SCM2/3 Backplane
CAADCO
XIBM/MSCA DC
STASR 3
CS05 Backplane
CACBTE
STASR 2
Backplane
SUMA
STASR 1
Backplane
BTSRI5
BTSRI
4 Outdoor Cabinets
This section describes the outdoor cabinets used in 9100 BTS configurations.
Side compartment
BTS compartment 1
BTS compartment 2.
MBO1/MBO1E
MBOE/MBOEE.
MBOEDC/MBOEEDC.
COMI COEP
Service Light
and AC Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment 2 Smoke
Power Socket Detector
Service Light
Equipment and AC
Labels Power Socket
(not neces
Electricity sarily
Door Alarms Meter Option STASR 5 equipped)
Override ACSB
Option
Key Switch
DCDP
Interconnection Not neces
Panel sarily
equipped
STASR 2 STASR 4
SRACDC or
ACSR
Door Alarm
Document Switch
Holder (installation
on upper or
BTSRIOUT STASR 1 STASR 3 lower posi
tion)
Battery (2 BU41s
or BU100)
Flood De
tector
(installation
on left or
right posi
tion)
Front View
Top View
CODI COEP
Equipment
Labels
ACSU
Door Alarms
Override STASR 3 STASR 6
Key Switch STASR 7
(Busbar)
Interconnection
Panel
Door Alarm
LPFU Switch
Flood
Detector BTSRIOUT
Front View
HEAT2 HEAT2
HEAT2
Top View
Equipment
Labels
ACSU
Door Alarms
STASR 6
Override
STASR 3
Key Switch
(Busbar)
OUTC
Document STASR 5
Holder STASR 2
Door Alarm
Switch
Battery STASR 4
LPFU
Flood
Detector
Front View
HEAT2
HEAT2
HEX2 HEX2
Top View
Smoke Detektor
AC Switch Unit
(ACMU)
LPFM
ADAM4
STASR 7
HEX Breaker
Options Area
(e.g. Microwaves)
Door Alarms
STASR 3 Override
Key Switch
Batteries
Document
Holder
OUTC
STASR 2
Battery Cover
Batteries
Door Alarm
STASR 1
Switch
Flood
Detector
Front View
HEAT2
HEX4
Top View
Smoke Detektor
DC Connection Unit
(DCMU)
HEX Breaker
Options Area
(e.g. Microwaves)
Door Alarms
STASR 3 Override
Key Switch
OUTC
STASR 2
Door Alarm
STASR 1
Switch
Flood
Detector
Front View
HEATDC
HEX4
Top View
Document
Holder Smoke Detektor
HEX Breaker
Options Area
(e.g. Microwaves) STASR 3
Door Alarms
Override
Key Switch
STASR 2
Batteries
OUTC
Battery Cover
ACDUE STASR 1
Door Alarm
PM 18
Switch
Flood
Detector
Front View
HEAT2
HEX9
Top View
Document
Holder Smoke Detektor
HEX Breaker
Options Area
(e.g. Microwaves) STASR 3
Door Alarms
Override
Key Switch
STASR 2
Options Area
(e.g. Microwaves)
OUTC
DCDUE STASR 1
Door Alarm
Switch
Flood
Detector
Front View
HEATDC
HEX9
Top View
STASR 7
HEX Breaker
Options Area
(e.g. Microwaves)
STASR 3
Batteries
Document
Holder OUTC
STASR 2
Battery Cover
Batteries
Door Alarm
STASR 1 Switch
Front View
HEX4
Top View
Service Light
MBO1 MBOE
Smoke Detektor
AC Switch Unit
(ACMU)
LPFM
ADAM4
HEX Breaker
STASR 7 STASR 0
Options Area
Door Alarms
(e.g. Microwaves)
Override
Key Switch
STASR 3 STASR 6
Batteries
OUTC
Document
Holder
STASR 2 STASR 5
Battery Cover
Batteries
Door Alarm
Switch
STASR 1 STASR 4
Flood
Detector
Front View
HEAT2
HEAT2
HEX4
HEX3
Top View
Service Light
MBO1E MBOEE
Smoke Detektor
Document
Holder
HEX Breaker
Batteries
STASR 2 STASR 5
ACDUE
OUTC
Battery Cover
PM 18 Flood
Detector
Front View
HEAT2
HEAT2
HEX9
HEX8
Top View
Service Light
MBO1DC MBOEDC
Smoke Detektor
DC Connection Unit
(DCMU)
HEX Breaker
Options Area
Door Alarms
(e.g. Microwaves)
Override
Key Switch
STASR 3 STASR 6
OUTC
STASR 2 STASR 5
Door Alarm
Switch
STASR 1 STASR 4
Flood
Detector
Front View
HEATDC
HEAT2
HEX4
HEX3
Top View
Service Light
MBO1EDC MBOEEDC
Smoke Detektor
Document
Holder
HEX Breaker
Options Area
(e.g. Microwaves) STASR 2 STASR 5
DCDUE
OUTC
Flood
Detector
Front View
HEATDC
HEATDC
HEX9
HEX8
Top View
DCUC
ACUC
STASR 2 OUTC
LPFC
ADAM 2
External Batteries
Breaker
Cables Entry
STASR 1
Front View
HEAT3
HEX5
Top View
4.1.14.1 COME/COMI
At the top of the compartment, there is room for an optional electricity meter. An
ACSB provides AC distribution and circuit breakers for the incoming AC mains
supply. The ACSB also provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines.
The SRACDC or ACSR houses the modules that convert the AC mains supply
into a 0/-48 VDC supply.
Between the side compartment and BTS compartment 1 is the Interconnection
Panel. This provides connectors for DC supplies, and for the external Abis,
alarm and clock cables.
4.1.14.2 CODE/CODI
AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the side
compartment. The LPFU provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines
and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the top of the side compartment
is the ACSU which provides AC distribution. The ACSU contains AC circuit
breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.
Directly underneath the ACSU, a STASR contains the ADAM and three PM12s.
There is also provision for optional microwave equipment.
An additional BU41 or BU100 can be fitted above the batteries, on the floor.
The Interconnection Panel is located between the side compartment and BTS
compartment. This provides connectors for DC supplies, and for the external
Abis, alarm and clock cables.
4.1.14.3 CPT2
AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the side
compartment. The LPFU provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines
and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the top of the side compartment
is the ACSU which provides AC distribution. The ACSU contains AC circuit
breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.
Directly underneath the ACSU a STASR contains the ADAM and three PM12s.
Directly above the batteries a STASR contains up to four TREs and three
FANUs.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).
It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and provides
connectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external Abis,
alarm and clock cables.
4.1.14.4 Common Features
Other equipment items include:
BOSU for power distribution. In the CODE, circuit breakers are provided
in the BOSU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB, HEX2, STASR7
and the Power Distribution Units
HEAT2 on the floor in the COME and on the lower left side panel in the
CODE/CPT2
Two optional BU41s or one BU100 on the floor in the COME. The CODE
has one BU41 or one BU100 on the floor; and an additional BU41 or BU100
can be fitted above (as an option)
The method used for DC supply isolation depends on the compartment type:
For COME, up to two HEAT2s on the floor; one HEAT2 for CODE
4.1.17 MBO1
MBO1 is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. All external cables
enter the MBO1 at roof top.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFM located at the left upper side of the
MBO1 compartment. The LPFM provides lightning protection for the AC supply
lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the left upper back side
of the compartment is the ACMU which provides AC distribution. The ACMU
contains AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.
Underneath the ACMU optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed.
The batteries (BU101) are located directly underneath these optional modules.
There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and two
batteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series.
To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installed
which contains four STASRs. The top STASR (STASR7) contains ADAM4 and
two, three or four PM12s.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above
contains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3
above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three
FANUs each.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).
It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and provides
connectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external Abis,
alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
BOMU for power and alarm distribution in MBO1/MBOE. Circuit breakers
are provided in the BOMU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB,
HEX3/HEX4, STASRs and the Power Distribution Units
HEX4 on the inside of the door
4.1.18 MBO1DC
MBO1DC is designed to house DC power equipment. All external cables enter
the MBO1DC at roof top.
DC mains power is applied to the DCMU located at the left upper side of
the MBO1DC compartment. The DCMU provides DC distribution inside the
cabinets. It contains DC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated
power relays.
Optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed underneath the DCMU.
Directly underneath these optional modules, there is an empty area.
To the right of the empty area and the optional modules, a rack frame is
installed which contains three STASRs.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above
contains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3
above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three
FANUs each.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).
It contains the XIOB, BTSRI and COAR functions and provides connectors
for DC supplies, temperature sensor plug SENSP, and for the external Abis,
alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
4.1.19 MBO1T
MBO1T is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. All external cables
enter the MBO1T at roof top.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFMT located at the left upper side of the
MBO1T compartment. The LPFMT provides lightning protection for the AC
supply line and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the left upper back
side of the compartment is the ACMUT which provides AC distribution. The
ACMUT contains an AC circuit breaker.
Optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed underneath the ACMUT.
The batteries (BU101) are located directly underneath these optional modules.
There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and two
batteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series.
To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installed,
containing four STASRs. The top STASR (STASR7) contains ADAM4 and
two or three PM12s.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above
contains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules, as required. STASR3
above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three
FANUs each.
The Outdoor Control Board (OUTC) is located on the right side of the
compartment. It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and
provides connectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external
Abis, alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
BOMUT for power and alarm distribution in MBO1T. Circuit breakers are
provided in the BOMUT for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB, HEX4,
STASRs and one Power Distribution Units
4.1.20 MBO1E
MBO1E is designed to be powered alternatively by primary AC or DC power
supply. In case of AC power supply, an ACDUE and PM18 modules are
equipped, while in case of DC power supply, a DCDUE is equipped. All external
cables enter the MBO1E at bottom plate.
AC mains power is applied to the ACDUE located at the left lower side of
the MBO1E compartment. The ACDUE provides lightning protection for the
AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. The ACDUE
provides also AC distribution, AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the
associated power relays.
DC mains power is applied to the DCDUE located at the left lower side of
the MBO1E compartment. The DCDUE provides DC distribution inside the
cabinets. It contains DC circuit breakers and the associated power relays.
Optional modules (e.g., microwaves) or batteries are installed behind the
ACDUE.
There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and
two batteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series. A second
battery branch can be installed on top of the first one.
To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installed
which contains three STASRs and the power supply subrack.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above
contains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3
above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three
FANUs each.
The Outdoor Control Board (OUTC) is located on the right side of the
compartment. It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and
provides connectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external
Abis, alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
4.1.21 MBOE
An MBOE holds four STASRs. The top subrack (STASR0) can be used for
optional 19" units. The bottom subrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREs
and three FANUs each. STASR5 above contains a mixture of ANC and ANY
modules as required. STASR6 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of
TREs and an ANC and three FANUs each.
Other equipment includes:
4.1.22 MBOEDC
An MBOE holds three STASRs. STASR0 use was cancelled. In the free
space above STASR6, optional 19" equipment can be fitted. The bottom
subrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR5
above contains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. STASR6
above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three
FANUs each.
Other equipment includes:
4.1.23 MBOEE
An MBOEE holds three STASRs and optional equipment. The bottom subrack
(STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR5 above
contains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. STASR6 above
contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUs
each.
Other equipment includes:
4.1.24 CBO
4.1.24.1 CBO AC Variant
CBO is designed to house two TREs with up to two ANCs and an optional
BATS module. Above the STASRs, up to three 19" units can be installed.
All external cables enter the CBO at the right side of the cabinet where the
cables entry is located.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFC located above the cable entry of the
CBO cabinet. The LPFC provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines
and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. Above the LPFC is the ACUC
which provides AC distribution. The ACUC contains AC circuit breakers, a
thermostat and an AC power socket.
The DCUC, which provides DC distribution, is located above the ACUC.
At the top of the rack space is foreseen for options installation. A maximum
of three MW units can be installed.
The bottom STASR (STASR1) contains the ADAM2, two PM12s, SUMA and up
to two TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above contains the BATS and up to
two ANC modules.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC). It
contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions, temperature sensor,
and for the external Abis, alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
Degasing filtered holes are foreseen at the top and the bottom of the cabinet
Two holes are foreseen at the bottom of the door for water outlet from HEX5.
Two holes are foreseen at the bottom of the door for the water outlet from
HEX5.
BTS Compartment 1
Subrack Mounting
Rail
BTS Compartment 2
Lifting Ring
Inner Roof (flat on
CODE/CODI)
Bolt and
Washer
Interconnection
Panel
RIBAT (CODE/
CODI only)
Side Panel
Side panel
Outdoor Control Board (OUTC)
4.2.6.1 Construction
Each 9100 BTS compartment consists of a box-shaped frame bolted to a plinth.
Other components are added to this basic construction, as required. Two or
three compartments are bolted together. The method of joining the cabinets is
different for each variant. One COME/COMI variant uses joining brackets fixed
to the sides and bottom of the cabinet frame. Another COME/COMI variant and
CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E
use four M8 bolts in the corners of the cabinet with guiding channels at the rear
of the cabinet to help locate the fixing tool and bolts.
The COME/COMI side compartment and BTS Compartment 1 are separated
by perforated panels which prevents RF interference from entering the side
compartment. Similar panels are used in CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO2 but
only as a structural element and support for COAR and RIBATs (CODE/CODI)
or OUTC (CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E). The
space between BTS Compartments 1 and 2 is open.
Each compartment has a separate rear panel. In the COME/CODE, the
side compartment and BTS Compartment 2 each have a side panel. In the
COMI/CODI/CPT2, the side compartment and BTS Compartment 1 each have
a side panel. In the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T, the compartment has two side
panels. In the MBO2/MBO2DC, MBO1/MBO1DC and MBOE/MBOEDC have
a side panel each.
4.2.6.2 Roof
The outer roof of each compartment can be raised at the front and
unhinged at the rear for removal. This reveals an inner roof (flat on
CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBOx/MBOxDC/MBOxE) and four lifting rings. Each outer
roof must be removed, in turn, from right to left.
On MBOx/MBOxDC roofs, a label warns to lift the top cover with care in
windy conditions.
4.2.6.3 Door
All the 9100 BTS cabinets can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall
configurations. Access to each compartment is via a door at the front. The
door provides both an environmental and EMC seal when closed. Mounted
on the inside of the door is a HEXx. Above (COME/COMI/CBO) or under
(CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E) the
HEXx is a latch mechanism for keeping the door open during maintenance.
Each door contains a door lock opened by a key. Each door presses an
electronic switch. All door switches are serially connected. In the side
compartment or MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E compartment, there is another
mounted electronic switch, referred to as the door alarm override switch, which
uses the same key as the side compartment or MBO/MBODC compartment
door lock. It ensures that non-authorized opening of the doors leads to
an alarm.
At least 0.8 m free space must be left in front of the cabinet doors, and 0.1 or
0.2 m at the side and back.
4.2.6.4 Subracks
The subracks are secured to two vertical mounting rails. The rails are
positioned on the left and right sides of each compartment.
Refer to Standard Telecommunications Subrack (Section 6) and AC Power
Subracks (Section 7) for more information on STASR, SRACDC, and ACSR,
respectively.
4.2.6.17 Extensibility
The BTS cabinet COMI can be extended onsite to COME by adding an additional
BTS cabinet COEP on the right hand side. The same applies to extend a CODI
to a CODE by adding a COEP. An MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO1EDC cabinet
can be extended onsite to MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/MBO2EDC by adding an
MBOE/MBOEDC/MBOEE/MBOEEDC. The MBO1T cabinet is not extensible.
AC Connectors
Light Heater RIBAT1
COAR COAR
Ground
RIBAT2
DC Connectors
48 V (Blue) 0 V (Red) 48 V (Blue) 0 V (Black)
The interconnection panel carries the components listed in the following table.
COME/ CODE/
Components COMI CODI
Two filter connectors to provide 230 VAC power for HEAT2, service light and AC X -
power socket in BTS compartment 1.
M8 ground bolt. X -
ExtAlarms
External
Input/
Output Surge
Protectors
Interface
Group Alarms
Side Comp
X303
XI1724
XBCB
XGND
Equipment
XRT Labels
HEX
XCLK2 Power
External In/Out XGPS
Clock
XCLK1
Interface
In
Group
Abis 4
XCLK1
Out
Abis 3
Abis
Interface Abis 2
Group Abis
Relays
Abis 1
Krone Strip
The shaded areas in the above figure identify separate external interface
groups. All these interfaces are overvoltage protected.
ExtAlarms Alarms
Side
External Comp
Input/ EBCB
Output
Interface
Group Surge
Protectors
X303
XI1724
XBCB
XGND
Equipment
XRT Labels
XCLK2
In/Out XGPS
External
Clock XCLK1
Interface In
Group Abis 4
XCLK1
Out
Abis 3
Abis Abis 2
Interface
Abis
Group
Relays
Abis 1
Krone Strip
ALARM BTS1
ALARM BTS2
COME/
COMI
only
HEX
Power
ABIS 1+2
ABIS1
The XIOB is located behind the COAR (BTS compartment 1 side). The XIOB is
connected to the COAR and contains a 24 V DC/DC converter and interface
circuitry for external alarms.
The COAR provides interfaces for:
XIO
External clock
Abis
Miscellaneous connections.
4.4.1 XIO
The XIO connectors allow various alarm devices to be connected to the 9100
BTS. These include smoke and flood detectors, as well as electro-mechanical
switches. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors.
Figures 234 , 235 and 238 show the positions of the XIO connectors.
The following table describes the XIO interface connectors.
BTS BTS
Pre-wired Side Compartment Compartment
Internal Alarm Compartment 1 2
Door alarm* X X X
Door alarm X - -
over-ride
Heat exchange. X ** X X
alarm*
* These alarms are serially linked and reported as only one alarm in case
of multi-failure.
** When equipped (more than six TREs).
*** For MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC only.
Pin Description
2 ALM 1 (GND)
4 ALM 2 (GND)
6 ALM 3 (GND)
Alarm Description
Alarm
Number XIO Input Alarm Class Alarm Connection Alarm Generation
1 1 9 Not used -
2 2 9 Not used -
3 3 9 Yes Inside
4 4 9 Yes Inside
5 5 9 Yes Inside
6 6 9 Yes Inside
7 7 9 Yes Inside
8 8 9 Not used -
9 9 9 Not used -
10 10 9 Yes Outside
11 11 9 Not used -
12 12 9 Not used -
13 13 9 Yes Outside
14 14 9 Yes Outside
15 15 9 Not used -
16 16 9 Not used -
17 17 9 Yes Inside
18 18 9 Yes Inside
19 19 9 Yes Inside
20 20 9 Yes Inside
21 21 9 Yes Inside
22 22 9 Yes Inside
Alarm Description
Alarm
Number XIO Input Alarm Class Alarm Connection Alarm Generation
23 23 9 Yes Inside
24 24 9 Yes Inside
EUC output alarms connected to BTS inputs: Sixteen free configurable ESD
protected alarm inputs are available in BTS. Connection by cage terminals.
The EUC alarm cable must be routed via bracket in rack top.
Vc
External alarm trigger BTS alarm input
R
1 mA
R
or
Alarms This includes the door alarm switch and the HEXx alarm.
HEX2 This is the 0/ -48 VDC power supply from the DCDP or BOBU
(COME/COMI (depending on COME/COMI variant).
only)
XIOB
BTSRI
RIBAT
EBCB (optional)
DC IN
EXT ALARMS
ALARM INPUTS
External
Input/
ALARM OUTPUTS
Output
Interface External
XBCB
SUN CONNECTION
Group Input/
XRT Output
Interface
SIDE COMPARTMENT XGPS Group
ALARMS
COMPARTMENT 1
ALARMS
ABIS4
Clock
XCLK 1 IN
Interface ABIS3
ABIS2 Abis
ABIS 3&4
Interface
Group
Abis
ABIS1
Interface
ABIS 1&2
Group
ABIS 1 ABIS 2
Remote
FLAT CABLE SIDE COMPARTMENT
Inventory
Part
RIBAT
Port
FLAT CABLE COMPARTMENT 1 TEMP. SENSOR
All the functions of these four boards are kept, except for the following:
The output voltage provided on the external output connector is 12 V instead
of 24 V. The current per output is limited to 50 mA instead of 100 mA.
DC VCC5.5
48/
60V Linear Linear External
DC Regulator Regulator Power Supply
VCC12
5V VCC_BRI XBCB_VCC
BCB_VCC
VCC
Temp SUM
Sensor
VDD
ALARM
XBCB
INPUTS NGTSL
ALARM
RIBAT Part
Outputs
NGTSL1
...2
...3 BTSRI Part
Driver
VCC_BRI
XIOB Part
NGTSL
BCB_VCC
BCB_VCC_BP
Abis
External Clock Interface
External Inputs/Outputs.
4.5.1.1 Abis
The Abis part provides the external interfaces for four separate Abis links (Abis
1 ... Abis 4). The interface consists of the connectors described in 9100
BTS Abis Interface Connectors (11) .
The KRONE Strip Connector also provides the possibility to monitor the Abis
links. Therefore, the overvoltage insert has to be pulled out and replaced
by a special monitor insert.
The interconnection between the SUMA and the OUTC consists of the following
cables:
Alarm Disable The alarm disable insert consists of a connector with crimp
Connector contacts which provides the short circuits for eight alarm
inputs.
It is inserted in the alarm input connectors which are not
connected by an external alarm cable to suppress alarms
based on open inputs.
EUC output alarms connected to BTS inputs: Sixteen free configurable ESD
protected alarm inputs are available in BTS. Connection by cage terminals.
The EUC alarm cable must be routed via bracket in rack top.
Vc
External alarm trigger BTS alarm input
R
1 mA
R
or
4.5.2 BTSRI
The BTS Remote Inventory part of the OUTC is used to store basic information
about a BTS in non-volatile memory.
Flat cables from compartment 1 and the side compartment or MBO1/MBO2 are
connected to the BTSRI.
The mounting position of the flat cables is located on the bottom of the OUTC
(see Figure 238 ).
The following figure shows the block diagram of the BTSRI.
B
C
Flat Cable B BCB
Side Compartment NGTSL EEPROM
Driver
or MBO1 p
l
u
s
Reset
Circuit
B Protection
C Overcurrent
Flat Cable B
BTS Compartment 1
or MBOE p
l BCB_VCC_BP
u
s
If the BTS is in traffic, the SUM can use the BCB bus as the interface
to the BTSRI
If the BTS is unpowered, the BTSRI can be accessed by an external tool via
the XBCB- (and BCB-) bus. Then the external tool provides the necessary
power supply. This feature is used only at factory level.
The subrack number is coded on the flat cable with holes. Five wires are
reserved on the cable for this purpose. Up to six subracks can be coded, which
corresponds to the large outdoor configuration.
4.5.3 XIOB
The External Alarm Input and Output Board (XIOB) is used as the interface
between the external environment and the BTS. The board provides 16 BTS
alarm inputs, eight additional non-BTS alarms, and eight alarm outputs. These
alarms are described in Tables 9100 BTS Outdoor Interface Connectors
(33) to 9100 BTS Outdoor External Alarm Inputs (36) . The XIOB functions
are integrated in the OUTC.
The following figure shows the block diagram of the XIOB.
48V in 12V out
12 VDC
5 VDC
EEPROM
BCB VCC Overcurrent 12 VDC
Protection
Alarm
Inputs
NGTSL 1
Outputs
GND
NGTSL 3 Alarm
Inputs
EBCB_VCC XBCB_VCC
TTL/ XBCB_BUS
RS485
EBCB_SP conversion
Three NGTSLs are used; each NGTSL handles eight alarm inputs. The first
NGTSL also controls eight outputs and the EEPROM, which is used to store
the remote inventory data of the XIOB. The third NGTSL can be used to pull the
alarm inputs to the active or inactive status for test purposes. It is possible to
pull the alarm inputs with software on active or inactive level in order to check
them. Alarm test 0 pulls all inputs to the inactive status and alarm test 1
pulls all inputs to the active status.
The alarm inputs use comparators to detect an alarm. Open alarm inputs are
regarded as active. A current of approximately 1 mA flows from the alarm input
to ground if the alarm input is pulled to ground. An alarm line must stay longer
than 1 ms in the active status in order to be detected as active.
The alarm outputs use Darlington transistor arrays with open collectors.
No galvanic isolation is provided between inputs/outputs to the BTS. One
common ground (GND) is used within the BTS including inputs and outputs.
If the BTS is powered, then the interface can be used to control external
devices
If the BTS is unpowered, the XBCB can be powered externally. Then the
direction of the interface is changed so that it can be used for remote
inventory of the BTS. This feature is used only at factory level.
The signal levels are according to RS-485. An ABTE 16246 is used as the
internal BCB driver.
4.5.4 RIBAT
The RIBAT board is part of the battery, but physically integrated in the OUTC.
Its task is to measure the battery temperature and to provide the OMU with
the temperature value and the battery Remote Inventory information which
includes the information of the battery type. Knowledge of the temperature
value is necessary for charging. The board contains a BCB interface to transfer
the information.
The RIBAT is supplied from the BTS not from the batteries. The power
consumption is about 30 mA. The operating temperature range of the board is
0 C to 70 C.
The connection and addressing differs for different configurations. The following
figure shows the RIBAT block diagram.
Remote Supply
Voltage Input
Fixed address
BCB 0000 0011 1100 0001
(JC1 hqx )
NGTSL
D
A
RI
EEPROM
Temperature
Sensor
The board consists of an NGTSL which is the terminal for the ISL data link,
the Remote Inventory EEPROM including the Remote Inventory information,
and the analog part for temperature measuring.
The analog part includes signal conditioning and an ADC to digitize the
temperature value. An external PT100 temperature sensor is connected
to the analog part. The ADC outputs are connected directly to the NGTSL
alarm inputs.
Power supply is provided remotely either via the BCB_VCC_BP or the internal
power supply of the OUTC.
The internal battery of the outdoor BTS is located inside a side compartment.
The RIBAT is connected to the BCB via a flat band cable coming from the
backplane.
The battery temperature range which can be measured is between -10 C and
70 C. This range is extended against the operating temperature range of the
batteries (0 C to 50 C) and the minimum operating temperature range of the
RIBAT to submit high or low temperature alarms. The measurement resolution
is 0.5 C. Values below -10 C means a short cut at the temperature sensor.
Values above 70 C means a not-connected or interrupted sensor.
4.6.1 COME/COMI
For the COME/COMI, there are two different power supply systems, one based
on PM08s with BCU1, and another one based on PM11s with BCU2.
Certain elements are common for both variants.
The AC input is connected to the ACSB via the optional electricity meter. The
ACSB contains lightning overvoltage protectors, input supply fuses, and circuit
breakers for AC power distribution. The AC input can be 230 VAC 1 or 415
VAC 3. The switched outputs from the ACSB are 230 VAC 1.
These are used for:
HEAT2s
Service light and AC power sockets
SRACDC or ACSR.
To/From
ACIB Control FANUs
Alarms
XBCB
ACRI
PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
0 VDC
Shunt
48 VDC
DC Bus
Shunt
BACO
SRACDC
BU41
Figure 244: COME/COMI AC/DC Power Supply System with PM08s and BCU1
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to ACIB (Section 12.1) and
PM08 (Section 12.12) for detailed descriptions of the ACIB and the PM08s,
respectively. Three PM08s are used in the COMI; five PM08s are used
in the COME.
Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Refer to
BCU1 (Section 12.16) , BACO (Section 12.18) and BU41 (Section 12.24)
for detailed descriptions of the BCU1, and the optional BACO and BU41,
respectively.
The DC supply produced in the SRACDC is connected to the DCDP via the
interconnection panel. Refer to DCDP (Section 12.30) for a detailed description
of the DCDP.
To/From
Control
FANUs
Alarms
XBCB
PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2
0 VDC
Shunt
48 VDC
DC Bus
Shunt
BAC2
ACSR
BU41 or
BU100
Figure 245: COME/COMI AC/DC Power Supply System with PM11s and BCU2
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM11 (Section 12.13) for a
detailed description of the PM11s. Three PM11s are used in the COMI;
four PM11s are used in the COME
Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Refer
to BCU2 (Section 12.17) , BAC2 (Section 12.19) , BU41 (Section 12.24) ,
and BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions of the BCU2, and the
optional BAC2 and BU41 or BU100, respectively.
The DC supply produced in the ACSR is connected to the BOBU via the
interconnection panel.
The ACSB used in combination with PM11s is slightly different from the
ACSB used in combination with PM08s. In Figure 245 , the ACSB distributes
the AC input directly to the PM11s and the ACSB executes the functions
normally performed by the ACIB.
4.6.2 CODE/CODI/CPT2
The CODE/CODI/CPT2 power supply system differs from that of COME/COMI
because it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functions
are performed by the OMU, which is part of the SUMA.
The following figures show the power supply system for the CODE/CODI/CPT2.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the side
compartment. The LPFU provides overvoltage lightning protection for the
AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detailed
description of the LPFU, refer to LPFU (Section 12.5) ). The AC input can be
230 VAC 1 or 400 VAC 3 .
AC power is then passed to the ACSU located at the top of the side
compartment. The ACSU provides AC distribution via seven AC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the ACSU are used for:
0 VDC
ADAM 48 VDC
DC Bus
STASR
BU41 or
BU100
OMU RIBAT
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. The
sense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21) , BU41
(Section 12.24) and BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions of
ADAM and the BU41, BU100 and BU101 batteries.
The DC supply produced in the STASR is connected to the BOSU and BOBU
via the interconnection panel.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar
via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylon
lightning, etc.
4.6.3 MBO1/MBO2
The MBO1/MBO2 power supply system differs from that of COME/COMI
because it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functions
are performed by the OMU, which is part of the SUMA.
The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1 and MBO2.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFM located at the upper side of the MBO1
compartment. The LPFM provides overvoltage lightning protection for the
AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detailed
description of the LPFM, refer to LPFM (Section 12.4) ). The AC input can be
230 VAC 1 or 400 VAC 3 .
AC power is then passed to the ACMU located at the top of the MBO1
compartment. The ACMU provides AC distribution via five AC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the ACMU are used for:
0 VDC
ADAM4 48 VDC
DC Bus
STASR
BU101
OMU
RIBAT * not necessarily equipped
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. The
sense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM4 (Section 12.23) and
BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of ADAM4 and the BU101
battery.
The DC supply produced in the STASR is connected to the BOMU via ADAM4.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar
via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylon
lightning, etc.
4.6.4 MBO1DC/MBO2DC
The MBO1DC/MBO2DC power supply system differs from that of COME/COMI
because it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functions
are performed by the OMU, which is part of the SUMA.
The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1 and MBO2.
DC mains power is applied to the DC In filters located at the upper side of
the MBO1DC compartment.
DC power is then passed to the DCMU located at the top of the MBO1DC
compartment. The DCMU provides DC distribution via four DC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the DCMU are used for:
BTS compartments
Service Light.
0 VDC
48 VDC
DC Bus
4.6.5 MBO1T
MBO1T is derived from MBO1 by reducing the used equipment.
The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1T.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFMT located at the upper side of the
MBO1T compartment. The LPFMT provides overvoltage lightning protection
for the AC supply line and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a
detailed description of the LPFMT, refer to LPFMT (Section 12.3) ). The AC
input is 230 VAC 1.
AC power is then passed to the ACMUT located at the top of the MBO1T1
compartment. The ACMUT provides AC distribution via one AC circuit breaker.
The switched outputs from the ACMUT are used for two to three PM12s in
combination with ADAM4.
For a detailed description of the ACMUT, refer to ACMUT (Section 12.8) .
The MBO1T is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8
bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1T (near LPFMT). From there,
separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules in
each compartment.
AC Input
LPFCT ACMUT
0 VDC
ADAM 48 VDC
DC Bus
STASR
BU101
OMU
RIBAT * not necessarily equipped
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14) for a
detailed description of the PM12s. Two or three PM12s are used in the
MBO1T. The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in
the OMU
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. The
sense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21) and
BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of ADAM and the BU101
battery.
The DC supply produced in the PM12 and is connected to the BOMUT via
ADAM4.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar
via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylon
lightning, etc.
4.6.6 MBO1E/MBO2E
MBO1E/MBO2E is designed to be powered alternatively by primary AC or DC
power supply. In case of AC power supply, an ACDUE and PM18 modules are
equipped, while in case of DC power supply, a DCDUE is equipped.
The following sections describe the power distribution systems for each case.
HEAT2s
Service Light and AC power socket.
Starting with ACDUE version 3BK 27266 ABxx the AC power socket is part
of ACDUE, apart of service light.
The MBO1E/MBOEE are grounded by connecting an external ground cable to
an M8 bolt fitted to the left lower side of the MBO1E (near the front left fixation
point). From there, separate ground straps are used to ground the major
equipment modules in each compartment.
AC Input ACDUE ACDUE AC to Heaters, Service Light
LP Filter Switching and AC Power Sockets
0 VDC
PM18SR 48 VDC
DC Bus
BU101
PM18C
Temperature
Sensor
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. The
sense data is passed to the controller. Refer to PM18 (Section 12.15)
and BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of PM18 and the
BU101 battery.
The DC supply produced in the PM18 power supply subrack and is connected
to the BOMUE.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus bar
via external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylon
lightning, etc.
Service Light
0 VDC
48 VDC
DC Bus
4.6.7 CBO
4.6.7.1 CBO AC Variant
The CBO power supply system is completely integrated in the BTS. The system
control functions are performed by the OMU, which is part of the SUMA.
The following figure shows the power supply system for the CBO.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFC located above the cables entry
compartment. The LPFC provides overvoltage lightning protection for the
AC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detailed
description of the LPFC, refer to LPFC (Section 12.2) ). The AC input is
230 VAC 1.
AC power is then passed to the ACUC located above the LPFC. The ACUC
provides AC distribution via two AC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the ACUC are used for:
HEAT3
AC power socket.
STASR
PM12/2 PM12/1
0 VDC
DC Bus ADAM2
48 VDC
BATS or
External
OMU
Batteries
RIBAT
Convert the AC input to 0/-48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14) for a
detailed description of the PM12s. Two PM12s are used in the CBO. The
operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU.
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. The
sense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM2 (Section 12.22) and
BATS (Section 12.28) for detailed descriptions of ADAM2 and the BATS
battery.
The DC supply produced in the PM12 is connected to the DCUC via ADAM2.
For a detailed description of the DCUC, refer to DCUC (Section 12.34) .
BTS compartments
Optional equipments
Heater HEAT4
0 VDC
48 VDC
DC Bus
4.6.8.2 CBO
For the CBO AC variant with the ACUC, a permanent connection is maintained
up to -33 C. When switched on at minus temperature, both the HEAT3 and
AC/DC are powered in time in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0 C.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C, the SUM switches on
the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational. The
HEAT3 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0 C.
4.6.8.3 CBO DC
For the CBO DC variant with the DCUC, a permanent connection is maintained
up to -33 C. When switched on at minus temperature, both the HEAT4 and DC
are powered in time in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0 C.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C, the SUM switches on
the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational. The
HEAT4 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0 C.
4.6.8.4 MBO1T
As MBO1T is designed to be used in tropical areas, only cooling facilities
are implemented by the HEX4 unit.
4.6.8.5 MBODC/MBOxEDC
With the DCMU/DCDUE, a permanent connection is maintained up to -33 C.
When switched on at minus temperature, the HEATDC is powered in order to
warm up the cabinet to above 0 C.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C, the SUM switches on
the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational. The
HEATDC prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0 C.
COME
COME
COME
CODE
CODE
BATCO Version AA BATCO AA connects the battery via breakers to the 3BK 25156
interconnection area. It includes a cable for the
battery temperature sensor.
BATCO Version BATCO BA connects the battery via breakers to 3BK 25156 X X
BA the interconnection area. It includes a cable for
the battery temperature sensor.
SENSP
CBOA CBOA is an CBO basic cable set. It contains cables 3BK 26346
for:
BATSC BATSC connects the battery to the ADAM board 3BK 26354
and the 0 V bolt.
BATCO CA-BABRM CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from the battery 3BK 25141 1
Version AA to the battery breaker.
CA-BRCM CA-BRCM connects -48 VDC from the battery 3BK 25246 1
breaker to the battery interconnection area.
BATCO CA-CBRM CA-CBRM connects -48 VDC from the battery 3BK 25868 1
Version AB to the battery breaker.
CA-BRCM CA-BRCM connects -48 VDC from the battery 3BK 25246 1
breaker to the battery interconnection area.
BATSC CA-PDCP CA-PDCP connects the 0 VDC from the battery 3BK 25231 1
to the ground bolt.
CA-ADACM CA-ADACM connects the -48 VDC from the 3BK 25248 1
battery to the ADAM2 board.
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals 3BK 07923 1
between the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals 3BK 07923 1
between the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.
CA-OSCP4 The CA-OSCP4 short circuits the Alarms BTS2 3BK 272003 1
connector on the OUTC. This suppresses the
MBO2 HEX3 and door switch alarms.
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals 3BK 07923 1
between the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.
CM02 CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for upper subracks (MBO2). 3BK 08809 2
AA
CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for bottom subrack (MBO2). 3BK 08809 1
BA
CM02E CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for upper subracks 3BK 08809 3
(MBO2E). BB
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals 3BK 07923 1
between the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.
CS08 Variant CA-DFUX CA-DFUX carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces to the 3BK 08503 1
BA SUM.
CA-MXBP CA-MXBP carries 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar. 3BK 08886 1
The cable connects to the microwave equipment
in BTS compartment 1.
CS08 Variant CA-2MMC2 CA-2MMC2 carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces to 3BK 08289 1
BB the SUM.
CA-MLBP CA-MLBP carries 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar. 3BK 08887 1
The cable connects to the microwave equipment
in BTS compartment 1.
CS09 CA-ABIS CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from 3BK 07922 1
the COAR to the SUM.
CA-H2PC1 H2PC1 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP. 3BK 08077 1
The cable connects to the BTS compartment
1 HEX2.
CA-OSPC CA-OSPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP 3BK 08079 2
to an STASR.
CA-XIOPC CA-XIOPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP 3BK 08087 1
to the XIOB.
CS10 CA-H2PC2 Cable Assembly - HEX2 Power Cable 2 carries 3BK 08092 1
0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP. The cable connects
to the COAR.
CS11 Variant CA12 Cable Assembly 12 is a flat cable that 3BK 08086 1
AA interconnects the BTS compartment 2 STASR
backplanes and the BTSRIOUT.
CA-H2PC1 CA-H2PC1 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP. 3BK 08077 1
The cable connects to the BTS compartment
2 HEX2.
CA-OSPC CA-OSPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP 3BK 08079 1 of AA,
to an STASR. 2 of AB
CS11 Variant CA12 CA12 is a flat cable that interconnects the BTS 3BK 08086 1
BA compartment 2 STASR backplanes and the
BTSRIOUT.
CS15 Variant BOBU BOBU carries AC and DC power supplies to 3BK 08742 1
CA the STASRs, XIOB, HEX2, HEAT, service lights,
customer and microwave equipment.
BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX2, smoke
detector, flood detector, and door switches to
the COAR.
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals 3BK 07923 1
between the COAR and the SUM.
CS15 Variant BOBU BOBU carries AC and DC power supplies to 3BK 08742 1
DA the STASRs, XIOB, HEX2, HEAT, service lights,
customer and microwave equipment.
BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX2, smoke
detector, flood detector, and door switches to
the OUTC.
CS16 BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to the 3BK 08741 1
HEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ASCB/ACSU.
Variant AA
BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key and
door switch to the COAR.
CS16 BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to the 3BK 08741 1
HEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ACSB/ACSU.
Variant CA
BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key and
door switch to the COAR.
CA-PDCM CA-PDCM carries -48 VDC from ADAM to the 3BK 25232 1
side wall interconnection area.
CA-PDCP CA-PDCP carries 0 VDC from ADAM to the side 3BK 25231 1
wall interconnection area.
CA-ADACM CA-ADACM carries -48 VDC from ADAM to the 3BK 25248 1
battery interconnection area.
CS16 BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to the 3BK 08741 1
HEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ACSU.
Variant DA
BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key and
door switch to the OUTC.
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signals 3BK 07923 1
between the OUTC and the SUMA.
AC Supply This cable can be made onsite to the desired length. The cable used 1AC 00468 0003
is a five-core, 6 mm sq. power cable.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 01328 0004
The cable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM
cable.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 00110 0011
The cable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.
CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminal 3BK 07951
to the BTS Terminal connector on the SUM.
CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 ground 3BK 08031
bolt on the side compartment floor, and to the customers ground point.
This cable can be replaced by one made onsite to the desired length. 1AC 00465 0003
The cable used is a 50 mm sq. yellow/green power cable.
OCC33 OCC33 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a 9100 BTS to 3BK 08304
another 9100 BTS.
The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms within
the COME/COMI AXXX.
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment
(COME only)
XIOB DCDP
CAXIOPC CAOSPC
X1 X12X14 To STASRs
(COME only)
X6 X7 X8 X9/X10
HEX2 CAADCO
(optional) CAOSPC
COAR
Door Switch CAH2PC1 AA
HEX2 HEX2
Alarms (COME only)
Key Switch BTS1
Power Power
CAAPC2
Alarm Alarm
Smoke Detector
Flood Detector
The following figure shows the cables and bus bars that carry DC power and
alarms within the COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI. Note that, although
the bus bars carry AC power, this is not shown in the following figure.
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment 2
Optional
Power
BOSU BOBU
Supplies
(CODE
only)
STASR 1
CAADCO
STASR 7 STASR 2
(CODE Alarms
only) BTS STASR 3
STASR 4
Alarms
Side STASR 5
Comp
STASR 6
COAR HEX2
HEX2 HEX2
(CODE/
(optional) COME only)
Door Switch
Flood Detector
4.9.1.2 CPT2
The following figure shows the cables and bus bars that carry DC power and
alarms within the CPT2. Note that, although the bus bars carry AC power, this
is not shown in the figure.
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1
GND GND
0 VDC 0 VDC
48 VDC 48 VDC
BOSU BOBU
STASR 2 STASR 4
CAADCO
STASR 3 STASR 5
Alarms
BTS STASR 6
Alarms
Side
Comp
XIOB
Function
HEX2 HEX2
(optional)
OUTC
Power Power
Alarm Alarm
Flood Detector
4.9.1.3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC
The following figures show the cables and bus bars that carry DC
power and alarms within the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E and
MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E.
GND
0 VDC
48 VDC
Door Switch
Key Switch
Smoke
Detector
Water
Detector
HEX4
STASR 7
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1 BOMU
CAADCO
X901
Alarms
X910
XIOB
Function
OUTC
0 VDC
48 VDC
Door Switch
HEX4
STASR 7
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1 BOMUT
CAADCO
X901
Alarms
X910
XIOB
Function
OUTC
GND
0 VDC
48 VDC
Key Switch
Smoke
Detector
Water
Detector
HEX4 HEX3
STASR 3 STASR 6
STASR 2 STASR 5
CAADCO
X901
Alarms
X910
XIOB
Function
OUTC
MBO1 MBOE
4.9.1.4 MBO1E/MBO1EDC/MBO2E/MBO2EDC
The following figures show the cables and bus bars that carry DC power and
alarms within the MBO1E/MBO1EDC and MBO2E/MBO2EDC.
GND
0 VDC
48 VDC
Door Switch
Key Switch
Smoke
Detector
Water
Detector
HEX9
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1 BOMUE
CAADCO
X901
Alarms
X910
XIOB
Function
OUTC
GND
0 VDC
48 VDC
Key Switch
Smoke
Detector
Water
Detector
HEX9 HEX8
STASR 3 STASR 6
STASR 2 STASR 5
CAADCO
X901
Alarms
X910
XIOB
Function
OUTC
MBO1E MBOEE
4.9.1.5 CBO
CBO AC Variant
The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms within
the CBO AC variant. Note that, although the bus bars carry AC power, this
is not shown in the figure.
GND
0 VDC
48 VDC
HEX5
Optional Equipment
STASR 2
STASR 1 DCUC
CAADCO
X901
Alarms
X910
XIOB
Function
OUTC
CBO
CBO DC Variant
The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms within
the CBO AC variant.
GND
0 VDC
48 VDC
HEAT4
HEX5
Optional Equipment
STASR 2
DCDU
STASR 1
CAADCO
X901
Alarms
X910
XIOB
Function
OUTC
CBO
4.9.2.1 COME/COMI
The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data
and control cables for the COME/COMI.
COEP
STASR5 Backplane
COAR
OCC23/OCC33 CAABIS
STASR2 Backplane
STASR4 Backplane
SUM
BTSRIOUT
CA12
BTSRI
4.9.2.2 CODE/CODI
The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data
and control cables for the CODE/CODI.
STASR 7 Backplane
RIBAT 1
COEP
RIBAT 2
COAR
OCC23/OCC33 CAABIS
SUMA
BTSRIOUT
CA12
BTSRI
4.9.2.3 CPT2
The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data
and control cables for the CPT2.
Option:
OCC23/OCC33 CAABIS
CABTSCA
STASR 2 Backplane STASR 5 Backplane
OUTC
SUMA
STASR 4 Backplane
CARICPT1 CARICPT2
4.9.2.4 MBO1/MBO2
The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the data
and control cables for the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC. The
STASR7 is equipped only in MBO1 and MBO2.
STASR 7 Backplane
Option:
OCC23/OCC33
STASR 3 Backplane
CAABIS
SUMA
OUTC
STASR 1 Backplane
CARIMO1
STASR 7 Backplane
STASR 0 Backplane
(not equipped)
Option:
OCC23/OCC33
CAABIS
SUMA
OUTC
CARIMO1 CARIMO2
MBO1 MBOE
Figure 268: MBO2/MBO2DC Data and Control Cabling
4.9.2.5 MBO1E/MBO2E
The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the data
and control cables for the MBO1E/MBO1EDC/MMBO2E/MBO2EDC. The
PM18SR is equipped only in MBO1E and MBO2E AC variants.
Option:
OCC23/OCC33
XBCBPS
PM18SR
PM18C
STASR 3 Backplane
CAABIS
SUMA
OUTC
STASR 1 Backplane
CARIC1
Option:
OCC23/OCC33
XBCBPS
PM18SR
PM18C
CAABIS
SUMA
CARIC1 CARIC2
MBO1E MBOEE
Figure 270: MBO2E Data and Control Cabling
4.9.2.6 CBO
The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the data
and control cables for the CBO.
Option:
OCC23/OCC33
STASR 2 Backplane
OUTC
CAABIS
CABTSCA
STASR 1 Backplane
SUMA
CARIBCO
This section describes the mechanical design of battery cabinets and cabling
between the battery cabinets and the BTS.
Breaker F3
Temperature Sensor
+ + + +
RIBAT 3
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
+ + + +
RIBAT 2
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 2
Breaker F1
+ + + +
RIBAT 1
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 1
Figure 272: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 3x1 Battery Units
Common
Breaker F4
+ + + +
RIBAT 3
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
+ + + +
RIBAT 2
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 2
Breaker F1
+ + + +
RIBAT 1
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 1
Figure 273: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 1x2 + 1x1
Battery Units
Common
Breaker F4
+ + + +
RIBAT 3
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 3
Breaker F2
+ + + +
RIBAT 2
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 2
Breaker F1
+ + + +
RIBAT 1
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 1
Figure 274: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 1x3 Battery Units
DC Output Connectors
(to BTS)
Circuit Switch
for one Battery Unit
Different types of
Battery Units just
shown for
demonstration
(cabinet must be
equipped with
identical batteries)
Circuit Switch
for one Battery Unit
Cover Plate
One battery terminal of each unit is connected with a temperature sensor, which
monitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by the
SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.
First this sensor information is collected and stored in RIBAT boards, which are
placed behind each battery unit at the rear side of the shelves. RIBAT boards
are powered by a BTS via RIBAT cable(s).
RIBAT boards (see RIBAT (Section 12.29) ) are connected with the XBCB
connectors placed at the connection area on the top. If battery units are
connected in parallel, corresponding RIBAT boards are also connected
together, producing a common result of monitoring.
RIBAT and DC battery cables are connected to the BTS(s) passing through the
battery cabinet on the top.
Temperature
Sensor Cable
(to RIBAT)
Front View
Jumper
Top View
Single Pole
Circuit Switch
+ + + +
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 3
Single Pole
Circuit Switch
+ + + +
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 2
Single Pole
Circuit Switch
+ + + +
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Battery Unit 1
5.2.1.2 Cabinet
The external outdoor battery cabinet consists of a box-shaped frame bolted to a
plinth. Four clearance long holes in the bottom (one in each edge) allow to fix
the cabinet to the fundament using M12 anchor bolts. Other components are
added to this basic construction. The cabinet has foam-insulated walls and roof.
The following figures show the internal arrangement of the different variants of
cabinets. The battery units are mounted in three shelves, one unit per shelf.
Each unit consists of four separate battery blocks (12 V) connected in line. The
minus line of each battery unit is connected to a separate single-pole circuit
switch placed at the DC breaker box above the battery floors in cabinet version
3BK 26004 AAAA and at the AC/DC distribution box in cabinet version 3BK
26004 AAAB. From that circuit switch, the minus line is connected to a bus
bar. Plus lines of all battery units are connected to another bus bar. Both bus
bars are connected with a double pole main circuit switch (placed at the DC
breaker box) and then with terminal blocks placed at the bottom of the right
side wall for further connection to BTS. An exhaust tube for each battery unit is
connected to the roof or bottom plate.
Adjustable brackets are at both sides of each shelf to position the battery unit.
The distance between battery blocks is maintained by means of spacers
supplied with the battery.
Battery units are covered in front with a small cover plate to secure the batteries.
RIBAT Plate Door Switch
RIBAT Plate
Smoke Detector
DC Breaker Box
A A
Transmission
Blocks
External External
Airconditioner Cable Entry Airconditioner Cable Entry
with integrated heater with integrated heater
Front View Front View
AC Box
(behind frame) AC/DC Box and
Transmission Blocks
(behind frame)
Battery Unit Battery Unit
Jumper Jumper
Figure 278: External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Variant 3BK 26004 AAAA (Left) and 3BK 26004 AAAB (Right)
5.2.1.3 Door
Access to the external outdoor battery cabinet is via a door at the front. The
door provides both an environmental seal and EMI protection when closed.
Mounted on the inside of the door is an air conditioner with an integrated heater.
Above the air conditioner is a latch mechanism for keeping the door open
during maintenance. Restrainers allow fixing the door open at 90 and 135.
The door has a 3-point latching system with a Eurocylinder barrel located
centrally, opened by a key.
The door presses an electronic switch. This switch causes an alarm, if the door
is open. The switch can be switched off during maintenance.
Surge Battery
Protections Residual Current Breaker Strings 1,2,3
Service Light/Socket
To DC Disconnector
Airconditioner/
Heater
Surge
AC Protections
Distribution
Box
Switch AC/DC
Airconditioner/ Distribution
Heater AC
Box
Main Switch
AC Switch
Main Switch Air conditioner/
AC Main Entry Cable Entry
Bottom Plate Heater Bottom Plate
Figure 279: AC Distribution Box for Cabinet Version 3BK 26004 AAAA (Left)
and 3BK 26004 AAAB (Right)
Temperature
Sensor Cable
(to RIBAT)
Front View
Jumper
Exhausting
Hoses
Top View
External
Air Path
Air Inlet
Air Paths
Door Side Rear Side Side View
The internal warmer air is taken into the internal fan at the top of the unit and
is forced through the evaporator coil and supplied back to the bottom of the
cabinet. The heater element is located in front of the fan intake area.
The external cooler air is taken into the external fan positioned in the bottom
of the unit and is forced through the coil and exhausted back to the external
environment at the top.
Supervision of the air conditioner produces one SUM alarm if the unit fails. The
alarm line is wired to signal terminals for further connection to BTS.
5.2.3.2 Heater
The heater is used for a warm-up period from -33 C and to maintain
temperature inside the cabinet above 10 C. The heater is integrated in the air
conditioner. The heater element (1 kW) is located in the upper internal part of
the air conditioner just before the internal fan intake.
The heater is controlled by a control board and is supplied by 230 VDC. For
protection, two thermal switches are placed close to the heater elements. Both
have a setting of 40 C for cut off and 25 C for resetting.
The breakers for the DC lines are fitted in the distribution box at the top
of the cabinet:
5.2.3.8 RIBAT
The RIBAT is a printed circuit board for remote inventory and temperature
supervision of the battery. Up to three RIBAT boards (one for each battery
unit) can be fitted in one cabinet. The boards are placed on a 19" panel and
fitted above the distribution box on the top. Each RIBAT reports the supervision
result at a dedicated address (for more information, see RIBAT (Section 12.29)
). RIBAT boards are powered by + 5 VDC provided from the BTS. RIBATs are
connected to the XBCB bus in the BTS via the CA-RIBEO cable.
AC 230V
TN-S, TN-C, TT power systems are used, 3- or 5-wire (L,N,PE). Voltage
range is -150 - 280 V AC and overvoltage protection class II installed in
each BTS cabinet.
XBCB
Needed for temperature regulation of charging voltage. XBCB is an external
connection to the BTS Control Bus with BTS specific requirements. It must
be placed next to external battery PBA RIBAT 3BK 25133 AAAA.
The RIBAT connections are:
Temperature sensor
XBCB cable to BTS
RIBAT termination.
Alarm
Optional interface used when an external equipment has to be supervised
by the BTS OMC (e.g. door of ext. enclosure, cooling equipment, smoke
detector etc., if any).
Up to three external alarm inputs can be connected, using dedicated
overvoltage protected terminals inside the BTS.
External alarm interface characteristics:
Electromechanical contacts or optocoupler, floating
Normal closed - alarm loop conductive in normal status (no alarm).
Grounding
All collocated equipment, antenna pole and feeders, BTS cabinet, external
equipment, cable trays, must be properly connected to the site common
bonding network (CBN) in the shortest possible way.
AC 230V
TN-S, TN-C, TT power systems are used, 3- or 5-wire (L,N,PE). Voltage
range is -150 - 280 V AC and overvoltage protection class II installed in
each BTS cabinet.
XBCB
Not applicable.
Alarm
Optional interface used when an external equipment has to be supervised
by the BTS OMC (e.g. door of ext. enclosure, cooling equipment, smoke
detector etc., if any).
Up to three external alarm inputs can be connected using dedicated
overvoltage protected terminals inside the BTS.
External alarm interface characteristics:
Electromechanical contacts or optocoupler, floating
Normal closed - alarm loop conductive in normal status (no alarm).
Grounding
All collocated equipment, antenna pole and feeders, BTS cabinet, external
equipment, cable trays, must be properly connected to the site common
bonding network (CBN) in the shortest possible way.
PC25BL1D, 3BK 25995 AAAA, Power Cable (-48 V), 1x25 mm blue
in 100 m roll
PC25B1D, 3BK 08963 BAAA, Power Cable (0 V), 1x25 mm black in 100
m roll
PC50YG1D, 3BK 08961 BAAA, Ground Cable, 50 mm green/yellow
in 100 m roll
CA12058, 3BK 08965 AAAA, Alarm Cable, L907, 4 quads, 120 Ohms
in 100 m roll
All external cables listed above are fixed installation cables connected to
terminals at both sides. Cable lengths depend on the local distance between
the battery cabinet and the BTS.
The CA-RIBEO cable is connected to the first RIBAT board on the battery
cabinet side. On the BTS side, the cable is connected to the OUTC board via
an XBCB connector. The mechanical design of the CA-RIBEO cable/connector
is found in External Cables (Section 16.2) .
TRE
SUMX/SUMA/SUMP
Microwave modules.
Module Connector
6.3.2 Backplane
The backplane is a multi-layer PCB. It distributes the -48/ -60 VDC, to power
the subrack equipment, and the digital signals between the various plug-in
modules. The following figure shows a front view of the backplane and the
positions of the various connectors.
Module Connectors Power Connectors
Ribbon Cable 0 V GND 48 V
Connector FACB
FACB Connectors
X113
X100
X116 Equipment
Label
Connector X117
Identity
X101 X102 X103 X104 X105 X106 X107 X108 X109
FANU Connectors
Pin 1, Row A
Power Cable 1 Three-core twin and earth, terminated with a three-in-one FASTON connector.
The following table lists the module connectors and the associated modules.
The symbol shows that the particular connector is a possible plug-in position
for the associated module.
TRE
ConnectorSUMA/SUMX
SUMP ANC ANX ANY TRE HP IDU
X101 - -
X102 - - - - - - -
X103 - - - - - -
X104 - - - - -
X105 - - - - - -
X106 - - -
X107 - - - - - -
X108 - - - - -
X109 - - - - - -
7 AC Power Subracks
7.1 SRACDC
The SRACDC is the power subrack used for all 9100 BTS outdoor
configurations with the PM08 power supply modules. It contains plug-in
modules which convert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-in
modules are fitted in predefined slots within the subrack.
SRACDC contains the following modules:
ACIB
ACRI
BACO
BCU1
Up to five PM08s
FANUs.
Backplane
Connector
Identity
Module Guide
Rail
There are five PM08 slots. The PM08s are identified by numbers in the range 1
to 5, as shown.
DCDP for further distribution to the STASR subracks, XIOB and HEX2s.
7.1.3.2 Backplane
The SRACDC backplane distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipment
that requires it. Two power cables carry the DC power to the equipment external
to the SRACDC. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and
the positions of the various connectors.
X204
X204 48V
R211
R201
X203
0V
X203
Module Connector
0/48 VDC
Power Out
Connectors FANU Connector
7.2 ACSR
The ACSR is the power subrack used for 9100 BTS outdoor configurations
with PM11 power supply modules. The ACSR contains plug-in modules which
convert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-in modules are
fitted in predefined slots within the subrack.
The ACSR contains the following modules:
BAC2
BCU2
Up to four PM11s
FANUs.
Backplane
Subrack
Fixing Lug
Module
Guide Rail
There are four PM11 slots. The PM11s are identified by numbers in the range 1
to 4, as shown in the figure.
The BOBU for further distribution to the STASR subracks, XIOB and HEX2s.
7.2.3.2 Backplane
The ACSR backplane distributes the 230 VAC supply from the ACSB to
the PM11s. The backplane also distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack
equipment that requires it.
One five-wire power cable carries the AC power from the ACSB to the
backplane. Two power cables carry the DC power to the equipment external to
the ACSR. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and the
positions of the various connectors.
Module Connector
L1 L2 N L3
7.3 ASIB
The ASIB is the power subrack for the 9100 BTS indoor configurations powered
from an AC mains supply. It contains plug-in modules which convert the
AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-in modules are fitted in
predefined slots within the subrack.
Backplane
X300
Connector
Identity
Module Guide
Rail
There are five PM08 slots. The PM08s are identified by numbers in the range 1
to 5, as shown.
The cabinet cable trunk for further distribution to the STASR subracks.
The subrack is fixed to the equipment rack with conductive M6 screws. Ground
continuity is maintained by the metal fittings and securing brackets.
7.3.3.2 Backplane
The backplane distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipment that
requires it. Four power cables carry DC power to the equipment external to
the ASIB. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and the
positions of the various connectors.
Module Connector
FANU Connector
This section describes and illustrates the Station Unit Modules, including the
functional blocks and their interfaces.
It includes a drawing of the physical appearance of the module, showing LED
indicators, connectors and controls.
Digital transmission
O&M functions
RI
The following figure gives an overview of all the interfaces connected to the
SUMP/SUMA/SUMX.
BTS
BTS
G1/G2/A9100 XCLK(14)
EXT CLK ref BTS A9100
CLKI (13)
OML(1)
RSLi(7), TCHi(8)
RSL(2),TCH(3) TRE
IOM(10), IOMCONF(9)
RCB(5)
BSC
Other Abis flows(6) IOM(10), IOM_CONF(9)
AN
Qmux(4) SUMA/
TSC
SUMP
AC/DC
*) MMI(17)
Battery
XBCB(12)
External
tool
:
*) for SUMA only
BTS Terminal
The following table provides information relative to the links mentioned in the
figure above. All external links connected to the CA in Figure 293 are routed
through the CA to the SUMX/SUMA/SUMP.
Note: The AN, ANX, ANY, ANC modules are connected to the BCB, but only the ANX
and ANC are connected to IOM and IOM_CONF.
Link 1 Comment
OML L The link carries O and M messages between the BSC and BTS. The link is routed
by the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX from/to Abis to/from BSII.
RSL L These links are transparently routed by the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX from/to Abis
Qmux L This link is used for the remote transmission O and M between the TSC and the
Transmission part of the BTS.
RCB L This link is used to control the ring functions between the BIEs by managing F, S,
R, FEA, AIS bits.
Other Abis L All the other flows carried by the Abis are transparently routed in Abis ring or drop
flows through the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX.
IOM L This link carries O and M messages exchanged between the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX
and other BTS modules connected on the IOM.
These links are used for BTS internal O and M between SUMP/SUMA/SUMX and
other BTS equipment.
BCB P The link is connected to other BTS modules and allows the BTS Remote Inventory
supported by SUMP/SUMA/SUMX.
XBCB P The link is connected to the external tool for Remote Inventory. XBCB is changed
(EBCB) into EBCB in between SUMP/SUMA/SUMX and CA.
When the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX is powered off, the BTS module Remote Inventory
information is reported to the external tool through the EBCB. This feature is used
only at factory level.
When the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX is powered on, the alarms from XIOB are reported
to SUMP/SUMA/SUMX through the EBCB.
CLKI P This link distributes BTS internal synchronizing signals to TRE and AN.
XCLK P The link carries BTS external clock synchronization signals for either the master
or slave configuration.
XGPS P These flows are used in order to communicate with the GPS system.
It is External GPS when the GPS system is outside the BTS and Internal GPS
when it is plugged inside the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX.
These flows carry the supervision interface of the GPS system (Configuration,
Fault).
Link 1 Comment
MMI L This link is connected to a PC used as a BTS Terminal which includes the local
BTS O and M application. it includes:
The O and M commands for the Clock part of the SUMP/SUMA (for OCXO
calibration and OCXO tuning).
REL_CON P This relay command flow is used to control Abis relays. This flow has its own
physical interface.
1)
This column indicates for each link if it is a logical link (L) or a physical link (P).
The following figure shows the functional block diagram of the
SUMP/SUMA/SUMX.
External Interfaces Internal Interfaces
HFFI
2 Mbit/s BSII
Abis 1 2 Mbit/s Switch 2 Mbit/s
BSII 0
2 Mbit/s Transmission and 2 Mbit/s
Abis 2 BSII 1
& Clock Timing
2 Mbit/s
BSII 2
(SUMA
XGPS only)
XRT
O&M
MMI
XBCB RI BCB
HFFI Hook for Future Interface: It consists of 4 Lines which are in the backplane and
which are free for future evolution.
BSII
OMU
RI.
The SUMP uses two microprocessors; the SUMA/SUMX uses only one to run
the software/firmware for the O&M and Transmission and Clock functions.
Abis 1 2 Mbit/s
CLK Framer
Abis 2 2 Mbit/s
CLK Framer
BSII 0
XGPS Transmission &
Clock Micropro BSII 1
TMMI
cessor (*) BSII 2
(SUMA
(*) for SUMA part of the SUM processor only)
Abis Interface
Q1 link.
Relays, mounted on the cabinet interconnection panel, are used to route the
Abis links transparently if the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX is switched off.
The Abis Interface consists of the functional entities shown in the following table.
Clock Recovery The Clock circuit recovers timing from the PCM
link.
AIS detection
Generation of both frame clock and frame number for TRE and AN modules
in the BTS:
For the Master BTS, it is a local generation
For Slave BTS, both frame clock and frame number are aligned on
those provided by the Master BTS.
Distribution through the CLKI of GSM clock, frame clock and frame number
OCXO calibration (which is done on time in the factory and consists of the
measurement of the OCXO curve and is stored in the SUM EEPROM)
OCXO tuning (which consists of the change of the OCXO tuning value)
8.2.4 Q1 Link
The Q1 link is a logical link routed via the Abis Interface, the Timeslot Switch,
the BSII switch and the BSII to the O&M functions. The O&M functions are
performed remotely by the BSC TSC, via the Q1 link, or locally via a BTS
Terminal.
All 9100 BTS transmission equipment have Q1 addresses, which identify
them to the TSC. The transmission equipment is supervised by the TSC
using the Q1 protocol.
The TSC, or a local BTS Terminal, can interrogate the SUMP/SUMA/SUMX for
the following data:
Performance measurement
Alarms
Loop request
Firmware version
Hardware version.
The Q1 link is also used for software downloads, for configuration purposes.
BSII 0
BSII 1
BSII 2.
BSII PLL
The BSII PLL is logically a part of the CGU. It locks the BSII CLK to a fixed
frequency of 2.048 MHz. The clock is then distributed to the Transmission
and Clock/SUM microprocessor, and an NGISL device. Distribution is
via the SUMP/SUMA Glue Logic.
The NGISL device is an ASIC, providing an internal serial link to the Remote
Inventory EEPROM. It also performs serial-to-parallel conversion, to allow
the OMU microprocessor access to the EEPROM.
BSII Switch
The BSII switch performs the following functions:
Distribution of the system clock, TDMA frame clock and FN
64 kbit/s timeslot mapping
Q1 message routing.
The BSII switch is implemented with a CPLD, which is a part of the Glue
Logic. Its main function is to select between BSII 0, BSII 1 and BSII 2,
which are the internal interfaces for O and M data distribution and uplink
and downlink TCH.
The data is multiplexed, via line drivers, onto the internal interfaces under
control of the Transmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor. The Glue logic
monitors the status of the BSII PLL via a lock detect signal. The drivers are
disabled if the PLL is not locked to the BSII clock.
Configuration management
Fault management
Performance management
Test facilities.
The following figure shows the O&M architecture. It consists of the following
functional entities:
SDRAM
Flash EEPROM
Glue logic.
XRT
OMU
External Interfaces MMI
Microprocessor
(*) SDRAM Flash
LEDs
EEPROM
Control Bus
Glue
NGISL BCB
Logic
BSII
Accessing the RI
Collecting alarm/data
Boundary scanning
Boundary scanning allows remote access to a particular module, via a
boundary scan path. This facility can be used to reprogram the modules
initialization sequence. For example, by downloading fresh data to an
on-board Flash EEPROM.
For both internal and external BTS access, the BCB is used.
Voltage Value
+ 12 VDC +/-10 %
Voltage Value
Voltage Value
Camloc Fasteners
Module
Extractors
Abis 1/2
Connector Abis 3/4
Connector
Equipment
Label
LEDs
BTS Terminal
Connector
Test
Connector
Camloc Fasteners
Module
Extractor
E1 PORT 1/2
E1 Port 1/2
Connector
Dummy
Panel
HSE2
HSE 1/2
Connector
HSE1
Equipment
Label
BTS Connection
CA
Area Connector
MMIRS232
MMIETH TRANS1
BTS Terminal
Connector GPS
Connector
GPS
AUX1
TEST
Test
Connector
P1/P2
P3/P4
OP/OMTr LEDs
Module
Extractor ON/FAULT
HSE 1/2 RJ45 Provides two High Speed Ethernet interfaces for future - - X
use.
XRT
CLK1
Abis relay control.
On Link connected.
On Abis 1 serviceable.
On Operational.
On Abis 2 serviceable.
Off No alarm.
Off No alarms.
On Converter 2 serviceable.
On Abis 3 serviceable.
On Abis 4 serviceable.
Note: During a reset of the OMU microprocessor, all the red and yellow LEDs are
lit for approximately 100 ms. This is a test of the LEDs to ensure that they
are all working.
ON Operational
ON SUMX is powered ON
OFF No alarm
9 Transceiver Equipment
This section describes and illustrates the Transceiver Equipment, including the
functional blocks and their interfaces.
It includes a drawing of the physical appearance of the module, showing LED
indicators, connectors and controls.
In the TADH/TRADE/TADHE/TAGH/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAD/TRAG/TRAL/TRAP
TRE variants, TRED and TREA are implemented in one submodule (TREDAx).
The following figure shows the TRE basic architecture.
TREDAx (for TADH/TRAD/TRAG/TRAL/TRAP)
TREDAxE (for TRADE/TADHE/TRAGE/TAGHE)
T(R)EPAxx to
TREPxx
The TRE performs the digital functions interface to the SUM and the analog
functions interface to the AN module. The TRE contains its own integrated
power supply.
The following types of TRE modules are available for the different 9100
BTS variants:
TADHE, TRE high power module for GSM 1800 GMSK and 8-PSK
TRAGE, TRE module medium power for GSM 900, enhanced 8-PSK power
TAGHE, TRE high power module for GSM 900 GMSK and 8-PSK
TRAL, TRE medium power module for GSM 850
Not all BSS software releases support GSM 850 . For more information,
contact Alcatel-Lucent support.
BCBT RI
ADR
SCP ETA
CLKI
CGU I2C
ECPL
MBED
DEM
BSII 0
DEC
BSII 1
MUX BED DEM CUL CUI
FHL
ENCT
The TRED (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM) consists of the following functional
entities (refer to the figure above):
Demodulator (DEM)
9.1.2.2 TRED Architecture of TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE,
TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP
RCD RPI Power USB : MMI
Swit/Reset Debug
ET
LEDs
BCB RI
ADR
SCP I2C
CLKI
CGU
BSII0
BSII1 ECPL
BSII2
DCOP IRDMC
UBEL
MBED
DEM
From
IRDM IF
DRCS Filter
DEC
MUX DEM
BED
FHL BBTX To
ASIC I/Q
HFFI Modulator
ENC TXP
ENCT on TREA
Figure 301: TRED Architecture (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE,TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP)
The TRED (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TADHE, TRADE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE,
TRAL, TRAP) consists of the following functional entities (refer to the figure
above):
ECPL
SCP
DEC
DEM
United Baseband Logic (UBEL), containing the MBED, DCOP, and IRDMC
ENCT
CGU
RI
ADR Module address: provides a unique address to each module in the BTS. Used to set BCB physical
BCB terminal address and BSII HDLC address.
BCB Base station control bus: used for Remote Inventory (RI) read write and for controlling and
supervision of the power supply.
CLKI Clock interface: used to distribute the 9100 BTS master clock and the frame clock multiplexed on
the same line with the frame number in a serial format.
BSII Base station internal interface: transfers all TCH-related data (traffic and signaling) and internal
O and M data. TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP: three
links, TRDH/TRDM/TRGM/TRPM: two links.
HFFI Hook for future interface, is a spare interface and can be used for future extensions.
FHL Frequency hopping link: used for downlink baseband frequency hopping.
RCD Remote cabling detection: detects DC voltage variations on the TREA receiver inputs.
PSwitch/Manual front panel power switch: disables the TREP/TREPS/TREPSH for TRE maintenance
Reset (security function for actions on RF cables). Also used to generate the push button reset
(PB_SRST) with fast off/on sequence.
I2C Interface to the TREA EEPROM which stores the calibration and adjustment data.
CUI Transfers uplink and downlink TCH data, and configuration/control data between TRED and
TREA.
USB Universal serial bus as known from the personal computer domain. It is used to channel the tool
interfaces ET/ISA, MMI, ALFS and Debug which are all targets for communication with a PC.
RI
LEDs
SCP Flash
Microprocessor SDRAM Memory
I2CA
Address &
Control Bus
Chip Select
Data Bus
9.1.2.6 Decoder
The decoder performs uplink channel decoding, and interfaces the TRAU
frames to the BSII. The hardware consists of a DSP and an SRAM.
The functions performed by the decoder are:
Measurements preprocessing
In-band control of the demodulator.
Block Diagram
The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the decoder.
To/From MBED
DSP and
Memory DCOP
IRDM IRDMC
only TRAx/TADH
Decoder DSP
The decoder consists of a DSP and its associated SRAM.
The input to the decoder consists of a serial interface. The interface carries
clock, frame signals and the demodulated data from eight RF timeslots. The
DSP decodes and transmits eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16 half-rate)
TCHs to the BSII, via the MBED. Each full-rate channel can be replaced
by a GPRS channel.
The ECPL interface is used mostly for booting code during resets. The
interrupt/reset interface sets the boot mode, and later provides frame and
timeslot interrupts.
9.1.2.10 Demodulator
The demodulator demodulates the uplink channels.
The functions performed are:
DC offset compensation.
Block Diagram
The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the demodulator.
Modulated Input Demodulated
from CUL/DRCS Output to MBED
ECPL Interrupt/Reset
Demodulator DSPs
The demodulator consists of two DSPs, each of which has its own SRAM.
The inputs to the demodulator consist of two serial interfaces. The interfaces
carry clock, frame signals and the data from eight RF timeslots. Each DSP
demodulates eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16 half-rate) TCHs for
one antenna path.
Baseband encryption
Baseband decryption
Timing Control
To Encoder
Ciphering
Encoder
Interface
Uplink and
Downlink Frequency
BSII BSII Hopping Link FHL
Multiplexer Multiplexer
Block
Decoder
Interface Demodulator
To Demodulator
Interface
To Decoder
Control The Control block is the main controlling function of the MBED. It contains several status
and control registers that are updated via the ECPL interface.
Timing The Timing block is connected to CLKI which carries the master clock, frame clock and
frame number. The main role of the timing block is to:
Provide clocks for the DSPs
Ciphering The Ciphering block performs pattern generation according to the configuration
information, that is:
A5 type
Encryption/decryption key
Frame number.
The configuration information is sent in band from the encoder/decoder. This means that it
is possible to change the A5 algorithm and key on a call-by-call basis.
BSII The BSII Multiplexer selects between the BSII links for the uplink and downlink directions.
Multiplexer The selection of the correct bits to be sent downlink, and the insertion of bits at the correct
position in uplink, is done by the DSPs.
TCH data from the demodulator is forwarded to the decoder. The deciphering bits
coming from the ciphering block are added to this data stream.
The Downlink Multiplexer splits the data stream coming from the encoder:
In-band signaling from the TXP is forwarded to the demodulator, together with the
ARFCN
The downlink ciphering key is extracted and forwarded to the ciphering block. The
ciphering bits from the ciphering block are sent back to the ENCT
Frequency The Frequency Hopping Link Block provides the interface to the FHL. If the FHL is
Hopping configured and used, the data is sent to, and received from, the FHL. If the FHL is not
Link Block configured, the downlink data is forwarded to the TXP.
Demodulator The Demodulator Interface provides clock and frame signals for the demodulator DSPs.
Interface
Decoder The Decoder Interface provides the connection to and from the decoder. It also provides
Interface clock and frame signals to the decoder DSP.
Encoder The Encoder Interface provides the connection to and from the encoder and TXP. It also
Interface provides clock and frame signals to the encoder DSP.
DSP
Encoder TXP
Encoder
The Encoder encodes the data for eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16
half-rate) TCHs. Each full-rate channel can be replaced by a GPRS channel.
This data is received from the MBED. The encoded data, ciphering configuration
and the frequency number for the RF transmission, are sent to the MBED.
TXP
The MBED sends the encoded data to the TXP for transmission on the Air
Interface. It also sends the cipher bits coming from the ciphering block. The
TXP processes the data and extracts all additional information coming from the
Encoder or FHL. The resulting data stream is sent to the CUL or BBTX.
TX TX
IF TX Power
Synthesizer Synthesizer
Synthesizer Regulation
1 2
I
From
I/Q
ENCT
Baseband Modulator IF TX
via
Modulator & Filter Mixer
CUL To Combiner/
Upconverter
(CUI) Q Duplexer
TX Driver TX Power
Amplifier Amplifier
Cleanup Loop
RF Loop Coupling
Oscillator
TREPAxx
Baseband I/Q IF RF
Filter LNA RX0
Demodulator Filter Mixer
RX
ADC Synthesizer
1
To DEM
on TRED
RX From Antenna
via ADC Network
Synthesizer
CUL 2
(CUI)
Baseband I/Q IF RF
Filter LNA RX1
Demodulator Filter Mixer
TREA
Figure 307: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)
I To combiner
From Baseband Modulator IF
ENCT & Filter Mixer
Modulator Duplexer
Upconverter
Q
TX Driver TX Power
BBTX Amplifier Amplifier
Transmitter part
Cleanup RF Loop
Reveiver part Oscillator Loop Coupling
TEPAxx
IF RF
LNA RX0
ADC Filter Mixer
RX
Synth.
To DEM 1
on TRED DDC DRCS From Antenna
Network
RX
Synth.
2
IF RF
LNA RX1
ADC Filter Mixer
TREA
Figure 308: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG,
TRAL, TRAP)
TX TX TX Power
Synthesizer Synthesizer Regulation
1 2
I To combiner
From Baseband Modulator
ENCT Modulator &
Upconverter Duplexer
Q
TX Driver TX Power
BBTX Amplifier Amplifier
Transmitter part
Cleanup
Reveiver part Oscillator
TEPAxx/
TEPADHE
IF RF
ADC Filter Mixer LNA RX0
RX
Synth.
To DEM 1
on TRED DDC DRCS From Antenna
Network
RX
Synth.
2
IF RF
ADC Filter Mixer LNA RX1
TREA
Baseband Modulator The baseband modulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into two
baseband signals: I and Q. These baseband signals are fed to the up-converter.
The modulation is GSMK modulation or EDGE*.
* for TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP
I/Q Modulator and The I/Q baseband signals are fed to the up-converter. They are then
Up-converter transformed into the IF frequency band (211 MHz).
For TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE, the I/Q baseband signals are directly
transformed into the RF frequency band.
Transmitter Amplifiers The TX amplification stages are physically split between the TREA and TEPAxx
(or TREPAxx) sections (see Figure 307 , Figure308 or Figure 309 ).
The stages comprise the following three components:
TX Driver Amplifier
The TX Driver Amplifier stage is located on the TREA. It consists of a
preamplifier, power control circuitry, and a main amplifier. An isolator
provides output impedance matching and protection for a low voltage FET
on the output
Power Regulation
The Power Regulation stage is located on the TREA. It consists of a control
path and a multiplexing detection path. An EEPROM is used to store data
for calibrating the transmitter output power.
The control path consists of a 12-bit DAC. The detection
path consists of a 12-bit ADC and a low-pass filter. (For
TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP it is
implemented on the BBTX).
TX Power Amplifier.
The TX Power Amplifier is located on the TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) part of
the module. It provides the final amplification stage for the transmit RF
signal, from the TREA. It feeds the amplified RF signal to the AN module,
as required.
Clean-up Oscillator The Clean-up Oscillator provides spectrally pure reference clocks required for
synchronization of the transmitters, receivers and synthesizers.
Transmitter Hopping The Transmitter Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for the
Synthesizers transmitter. There are two hopping synthesizers working in parallel. While one
synthesizer is active, the other selects the next transmission frequency.
Receivers Two receivers are physically located on the TREA. The main functions of the
receivers for TRGM, TRDM, TRDH, TRPM are:
Low noise amplification
Down conversion
IF filtering
IQ demodulation
Baseband filtering
Baseband digitizing.
The main functions of the receivers for TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE,
TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP are:
Down conversion
IF filtering
IF sampling
Receiver Synthesizers The Receiver Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for the
receiver. There are two hopping synthesizers working in parallel. While one
synthesizer is active, the other selects the next receive frequency.
RF Loop The RF Loop provides an analog test loop between the transmitter and
receivers. It performs analog self-tests, mainly for start-up test purposes. The
RF Loop circuitry generates a frequency of 45 MHz (GSM 850/GSM 900), 95
MHz (GSM 1800), or 80 MHz (GSM 1900) and converts the transmitter output
signals to the receiver frequency.
The RF Loop functionality is physically split between the:
9.1.4.2 Fuse
The TRE power supply input is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking
capacity (15 A).
+ 12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V X -
+ 26 V 22.0 V 24.0 V X X X
TRE TRE
LED Color Status Description Version (1) Version (2)
On Link connected - -
On Fully operational - -
Blinking Initializing - -
On Transmitting - -
On Fatal alarm - -
Off No alarm - -
On + 5 V present - -
TRE TRE
LED Color Status Description Version (1) Version (2)
Off + 5 V faulty - -
On + 3.3 V present - -
Equipment
Label Transmitter
Connector
POWER
ENABLE TX
On/Off
Rocker Switch
OFF
Test Module
TEST
Connector Extractor
RX 0 Receiver
Connectors
RX 1
RSL TX
OP BCCH
LEDs
FAULT
5V 3.3V POWER
9.1.6.2 Front Panel - TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE,
TRAL, and TRAP
Camloc Fasteners
Transmitter
Connector
TX
POWER
ENABLE
On/Off
Rocker Switch OFF
TEST
USB Test Equipment
Connector Labels
Module
Extractor
RX0
Receiver
Connectors
RX1
RSL TX
LEDs 0P BCCH
PWR FAULT
Figure 311: TRE Front Panel (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG,
TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP)
9.1.6.3 Connectors
The following table describes the TRE front panel connectors.
Connector Description
TGTx
TGDAx
TGPAMx to
AGCx
from
TRAD TRAA
TGPAMx to
AGCx
from
TGPS
The TWIN TRA performs the digital functions interface to the SUM and the
analog functions interface to the AN module. The TWIN TRA contains its
own integrated power supply.
The following types of TWIN TRA modules are available for the different 9100
BTS variants:
RX Synth.
Modulator/
Filter / Buffer
for GSM, EDGE,
enh. EDGE
TX Synth.
CPLD SDRAM
Ramp DAC
SCP
BSII
DRC2
HFFI IQ
To/from LALE
MUX
FHL Monitoring
FPGA
SYS
ADC
DEM
HPI
DSP2 DEM ctrl.
DEC DSA
FPGA
SDRAM
SDRAM
Interface Description
BCB Base station control bus: used for Remote Inventory (RI) read write and for controlling
and supervision of the power supply.
ADR Module address: provides a unique address to each module in the BTS. Used to set
BCB physical BCB terminal address and BSII HDLC address.
RCD Remote cabling detection: detects DC voltage variations on the TRA-A receiver inputs.
BSII Base station internal interface: transfers all TCH-related data (traffic and signaling)
and internal O&M data.
FHL Frequency hopping link: used for downlink baseband frequency hopping.
HFFI Hook for future interface, is a spare interface and can be used for future extensions.
CLKI Clock interface: used to distribute the 9100 BTS master clock and the frame clock
multiplexed on the same line with the frame number in a serial format.
PSwitch/ Reset Manual front panel power switch. It disables the TGPS for TRA maintenance (security
function for actions on RF cables). Also used to generate the push button reset
(PB_SRST) with fast OFF/ON sequence.
TX Data Module
Buffer, modulator tables, filter, gain and offset adjust.
Ramping Module
Ramping control interface to ramping DAC.
TX Synthesizer Module
Interface to TX synthesizers.
RX Synthesizer Module
Interface to RX synthesizers.
GTA Module
Interface to GTAs.
Monitoring Module
Receives monitoring data. Performs demultiplexing and storing of the
monitoring data in corresponding registers.
9.2.2.9 CPLD
Contains the necessary glue logic for the SCP.
9.2.2.10 DRC
Diversity Receiver Chip integrates the interface between the digital and analog
baseband part in the receive direction.
I To combiner
From Baseband Modulator
ENCT &
Modulator TX1
Upconverter
Q Duplexer
TX Driver TX Power
Amplifier Amplifier
TGPAM1
TX TX Power
Synthesizer Regulation
2
I To combiner
From Baseband Modulator
ENCT & TX2
Modulator
Upconverter
Q Duplexer
TX Driver TX Power
Amplifier Amplifier
Transmitter part
To DEM X RX
From Antenna
on TRED DDC Synth.
X 1 Network
90
IF RF
ADC MUX Filter Mixer LNA RX1_1
X Cleanup
Oscillator
DRC
X
90
IF RF
ADC MUX Filter Mixer LNA RX2_0
To DEM X RX
on TRED DDC From Antenna
Synth.
X 2
Network
90
IF RF
ADC Filter LNA RX2_1
MUX Mixer
X
Figure 314: TGTx Analog Architecture
Baseband Modulator The baseband modulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into two
baseband signals: I and Q. These baseband signals are fed to the up-converter.
The modulation is GSMK modulation or EDGE.
I/Q Modulator and The I/Q baseband signals are fed to the up-converter. They are then
Up-converter transformed into the RF frequency band.
Transmitter Amplifiers The TX amplification stages are physically split between the TGDAx and
TGPAMx sections (see Figure 314 ).
The stages comprise the following three components:
TX Driver Amplifier
The TX Driver Amplifier stage is located on the TGDAx. It consists of a
preamplifier, power control circuitry, and a main amplifier.
Power Regulation
The Power Regulation stage is located on the TGDAx. It consists of a
control path and a multiplexing detection path. A Flash is used to store data
for calibrating the transmitter output power.
TX Power Amplifier.
The TX Power Amplifier is located on the TGPAMx part of the module. It
provides the final amplification stage for the transmit RF signal, from the
TGDAx. It feeds the amplified RF signal to the AN module, as required.
Clean-up Oscillator The Clean-up Oscillator provides spectrally pure reference clocks required for
synchronization of the transmitters, receivers and synthesizers.
Transmitter Fast The Transmitter Fast Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for
Hopping Synthesizers the transmitter.
Down conversion
IF filtering
BB sampling
Digital Decimation.
Receiver Synthesizers The Receiver Fast Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for the
receiver.
9.2.4.2 Fuse
The TWIN TRA power supply input is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking
capacity (25 A).
+ 24 V + 20.4 V + 22.3 V
Camloc Fasteners
Transmitter
Connector
TX1
RX10
RX11
ENABLE
ON/OFF
POWER
Rocker Switch
OFF
TX1 TX2
Transmitter
Connector
TX2
RX20
Receiver
Connectors
RX21
Blinking The TRX (x) has received the Configure Request, configuration
is ongoing
Normal
Blinking The TRX (x) is O&M operational with RSL established, waiting
for Telecom-configuration
Fast
OFF All alarms are OFF, the Alarms-in-force-lists (AIFL) of both TRX
are empty
Connector Description
RX11, RX21 Provide two receive RF Interfaces from the AN module via
the antenna diversity path.
10 Antenna Networks
This section describes and illustrates the Antenna Networks, including the
functional blocks and their interfaces.
It includes a drawing of the physical appearance of the module, showing LED
indicators, connectors and controls.
10.1 ANX
The ANX provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and the
antenna. The following figure shows the basic architecture.
RX0A Splitter
RX1A
RX1B Splitter
RX0B
On the downlink, the ANX connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. On
the uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.
The following types of ANX modules are available for the different 9100
BTS variants:
The following figure shows the ANX in more detail. The shaded areas identify
the uplink functions.
Directional
TXA In
Coupler
Uplink Functions
Duplexer ANT A
TRE RX0A Out
LNA
Filter
RX1A Out
Power
Splitter A AN BSII
LEDs Microprocessor
Remote Switching
DC/DC
Power Converter 48 VDC
DC Feed
Splitter B
RX1B Out
LNA
TRE RX0B Out
Duplexer ANT B
Uplink Functions
TXB In Directional
Coupler
No. of Components
Downlink
Component Description ANX ANC ANB AGC
No. of Components
Uplink
Component Description ANX ANC ANB AGC
Signal Description
The following figure shows the ANCON architecture. The shaded areas
represent hardware shared by different functions.
Flash
EEPROM
Backplane
VSWR Receiver Glue
Logic
Forward Baseband
TXA ADC BSII
Mixer Interface
Reverse
TXB Forward
Reverse
Input MUX BSII PLL 2048 MHz
Local AN
Synthesizer Microprocessor
Subrack
LNA 1 Address
LNA Control
Signals & Alarms LNA 2
CLKII CLKI
PLL Interface
DC Feed &
Rotary Switch
RI
Alarms
DC/DC BCB BCB
To LNAs
Converter On/Off ASIC Interface
RI
EEPROM
DC Input
48 VDC
Refer to the following sections for a description of the ANCON functional entities.
A local synthesizer
Input MUX.
10.1.4.4 AN Microprocessor
The AN microprocessor performs LNA alarm supervision and gain setting, and
control of the status LEDs. It also provides an interface to the baseband ADC in
the VSWR receiver (see Figure 318 ).
The microprocessor compares the ADC output with known VSWR values. If the
VSWR exceeds predefined thresholds, an alarm is raised (refer to Table ANX
LED Descriptions (82) ). If the reflected power is very high, the transmitters are
shut down to avoid possible damage to equipment. High reflected power can
be caused by, for example, a break in the antenna coupling.
The AN microprocessor hardware consists of a QUICC microprocessor
supported by two memory devices, a Flash EEPROM and an SRAM.
Baseband ADC
The Glue logic also controls the BSII frame clock PLL and the CLKII master
clock PLL with a clock edge control signal (see Figure 319 and Figure 320 ).
10.1.5.1 Voltages
The following table provides ANPS input/output voltage parameters.
Voltage Value
+ 12 VDC +/-3 %
10.1.5.2 Fuse
The input of the ANPS is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity
(15 A).
10.1.5.3 Protection
The ANPS circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarity
inversion on its inputs.
10.1.5.4 Grounding
Ground continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrack
backplane which connect to the bus bar ground.
12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V
10.1.6.1 LEDs
There are eight LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of the
operational status of the ANX module. The following table describes each LED
and their various operational states.
On Good VSWR.
On Good VSWR.
On + 5 V present.
Off + 5 V faulty.
On + 12 V present.
Off + 12 V faulty.
10.1.6.2 Alarms
The ANX detects the alarm conditions shown in the following table.
Transmit band. 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz
Receive band. 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz
Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz
Isolation between transmit ports (A >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB
to B/ 1 to 2).
Insertion loss in transmit pass band. 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB
RF input impedance. 50 50 50
RF output impedance. 50 50 50
RX0AOUT
Transmitter
Connectors
RX1AOUT
TXAIN
Antenna
Connectors
ANTA
ANTB
Equipment
Label
TXBIN
RX1BOUT
Receiver
Connectors
RX0BOUT
Rotary
Switch
VSWRA
O&M VSWRB
LEDs ALARM ALARM
5V 12V
The ANX has two transmitter input connectors and four receiver output
connectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANX module can be interfaced
to two TRE modules, or an ANY module if used.
The following table describes the ANX front panel connectors.
Connector Description
10.2 ANY
The ANY is a passive RF module, having neither a controller nor a power
supply. It is an optional RF distribution device, which is used to expand the
capacity of the ANX/ANC. Therefore, it is basically an extension unit to the
ANX/ANC module.
The following types of ANY modules are available for the different 9100
BTS variants:
ANYD, ANY module for GSM 1800
Not all BSS software releases support GSM 850 . For more information,
contact Alcatel-Lucent support.
The following figure shows the logical position of the ANY in relation to the
TREs and the ANX. It also indicates the signal paths.
TRE
Antenna TRE
ANX/ ANY
ANC TRE
TRE
Downlink Path
TRE
Antenna
TRE
ANX/ ANY
ANC TRE
TRE
Uplink Path
Uplink path.
Each of the four RF signals from the ANX/ANC passes through a 1:2
RF splitter. These signals are distributed in four groups to the TREs, via
external RF cables. Each group provides a path for antenna diversity
and non-diversity.
RX0A Out1
ANX/
RX0A In ANC
RX0A Out2
RX1A Out2
RX0B Out1
RX0B In ANX/
ANC
RX0B Out2
RX1B Out2
The ANY consists of the functional entities shown in the following table.
Inventory
Subrack number.
BCB ASIC
Serial EEPROM.
The inventory data, which is held in a serial
EEPROM, is transferred via the BCB ASIC and
the BCB Interface. The ANYRI components are
powered from a DC supply, which is present on
the backplane.
Transmit band. 869 - 894 MHz 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 1930 - 1990
MHz MHz
Receive band. 824 - 849 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 1850 - 1910
MHz MHz
Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz
Insertion loss at transmit band. 3.3 +/- 0.2 dB 3.3 +/- 0.2 dB 3.3 +/- 0.2 dB 3.3 +/- 0.2 dB
Insertion loss at receive band. 3.3 +/- 0.2 dB 3.3 +/- 0.2 dB 3.3 +/- 0.2 dB 3.3 +/- 0.2 dB
Intermodulation products at < -108 dBm < -108 dBm < -108 dBm < -108 dBm
antenna port with 2 x 40 W (2 x
30 W for GSM 1800 and GSM
1900) signals at one transmit
port and 50 on receive port
in receive band.
Intermodulation products at < -75 dBc < -75 dBc < - 75 dBc < - 75 dBc
antenna port with 2 x 40 W (2 x
30 W for GSM 1800 and GSM
1900) signals at one transmit
port and 50 on receive port
in transmit band.
RF input impedance. 50 50 50 50
RF output impedance. 50 50 50 50
Transmitter Receiver
Connectors Connectors
RX1AIN
TXAOUT
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
TXAIN1
RX0AOUT2
RX1AOUT2
TXAIN2
RX0BIN
RX1BIN
TXBOUT
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
TXBIN1
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
TXBIN2
Mnemonic or
Serial Number Module
Label Extractor
Connector Description
Connector Description
10.3 ANC
The ANC provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and the
antenna.
Its tasks are to:
Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where the
signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers
TXAIN1
Combiner Duplexer ANT A
TXAIN2
RX0AOUT1
RX0AOUT2 Splitter
RX1AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
ANCC
RX0BOUT1
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT1 Splitter
RX1BOUT2
TXAIN2
TXAOUT
External Bridge A
Directional
TXAIN Coupler A
Uplink Functions
RX0AOUT1 Duplexer ANTA
TRE A
RX0AOUT2
LNA
Filter
RX1AOUT1
RX1AOUT2 Power ANCC
Splitter A AN BSII
LEDs Microprocessor
BCB
Interface BCB
Remote
Switching
DC/DC
Power DC Feed Converter 48
Splitter B VDC
RX1BOUT1
RX1BOUT2
LNA
RX0BOUT1
TRE
RX0BOUT2 Duplexer ANTB
Uplink Functions B
TXBIN Directional
Coupler B
External Bridge B
TXBOUT
TXBIN1
TXBIN2
Load 60 W*)
TX Combiner B
Not all BSS software releases support GSM 850 . For more information,
contact Alcatel-Lucent support.
If one transmitter is used in each branch A and B, the RF signals pass the
duplexers before feeding the antennas.
If two transmitters are used in a branch, the coupler will be used in front of the
duplexer. This coupler is connected by an RF cable bridge.
The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals,
allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.
The ANC also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,
at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.
The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control,
remote DC feed and power splitters.
The ANC functions, interface, controller and power supply are given below.
10.3.4.1 LEDs
There are four LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of
the operational status of the ANC module. The following table describes each
LED and defines their various operational states.
On VSWR OK
On VSWR OK
10.3.4.2 Alarms
The ANC detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB
Alarm Conditions (83) .
Transmit band. 869 - 894 MHz 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz
4)
935 - 960 MHz
Receive band. 824 - 849 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz
4)
890 - 915 MHz
Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz
Isolation between transmit >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB
ports (A to B/ 1 to 2).
Insertion loss in transmit pass 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB
band without combiner.
Insertion loss in transmit pass 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB
band with combiner.
Intermodulation products at <-101 dBm <-103 dBm <-103 dBm <-103 dBm
antenna port with 2x 20 W
signals at one transmit port
and 50 on receive port in
receive band.
Intermodulation products at -75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc
antenna port with 2x 20 W
signals at one transmit port
and 50 on receive port in
transmit band.
RF input impedance. 50 50 50 50
1)
Parameter GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
RF output impedance. 50 50 50 50
1) Valid for ANCL only. 3) For ANC with bridge: >16 dB.
2) For ANC with bridge: >18 dB. 4) For ANCGP
Transmitter
Input Connectors TXAIN1 RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
TXAIN2 RX1AOUT2
RX0AOUT2
RF bridge TXAIN
(if TXAIN1 VSWRB
and/or TXAIN2 used)
ALARM
Combined
Transmitter ANTB
Output Connector TXAOUT
(TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
High Voltage
Warning
TXBOUT
Antenna
Connector
ANTA
Module TXBIN
Extractor
O&M
LEDs
VSWRA
TXBIN2
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
Receiver
Connectors
RX0BOUT1
TXBIN1
RX1BOUT1
TXAIN1
Transmitter
Input Connectors RX1AOUT1
TXAIN2 RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
RX0AOUT2
VSWRB
ALARM
Combined
Transmitter TXAIN
Output Connector
(TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
Antenna
Connector TXAOUT
ANTA ANTB
High Voltage
Warning
TXBOUT
RF bridge
(if TXBIN1
and/or TXBIN2 used)
TXBIN
Module
Extractor
O&M
LEDs
VSWRA TXBIN2
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
Receiver
Connectors TXBIN1
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
TXAIN RX1AOUT1
RF bridge
RX0AOUT1
(if TXAIN1 and/or
TXAIN2 used)
RX1AOUT2
TXAIN1
Transmitter RX0AOUT2
Input Connectors
VSWRB
TXAIN2 ALARM
Antenna
Connector
ANTA ANTB
High Voltage
Warning
Module
Extractor
TXBIN2
O&M
LEDs
VSWRA
RX0BOUT2
TXBIN1
RX1BOUT2
Receiver
Connectors
RX0BOUT1 TXBIN
RX1BOUT1
TXBOUT
10.3.6.4 Connectors
The ANC has four transmitter input connectors and eight receiver output
connectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANC module can be interfaced to
four TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.
The following table describes the ANC front panel connectors.
Connector Description
ANTA, ANTB 7/ 16 7/ 16
10.4 AGC
The AGC provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and the
antenna.
Its functions are to:
Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where the
signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers
TXAIN1
Combiner Duplexer ANT A
TXAIN2
RX0AOUT1
RX0AOUT2
Splitter
RX1AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
LNA
VSWR
AGCC+ MUX
AGCPS BiasT
UC
RX0BOUT1
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT1 Splitter
RX1BOUT2
TXAIN2
TXAOUT
External Bridge A
Directional
TXAIN
Coupler A
Uplink Functions
Duplexer ANTA
RX0AOUT1
TRE A
RX0AOUT2
LNA
Filter
RX1AOUT1
RX1AOUT2 Power AGCC
Splitter A AN BSII
LEDs Microprocessor
BCB
Interface BCB
Remote
Switching
DC/DC
Power DC Feed Converter 48
Splitter B VDC
RX1BOUT1
RX1BOUT2
LNA
RX0BOUT1
TRE
RX0BOUT2 Duplexer ANTB
Uplink Functions B
TXBIN Directional
Coupler B
External Bridge B
TXBOUT
TXBIN1
TXBIN2
Load 150 W
TX Combiner B
If one transmitter is used in each branch A and B, the RF signals pass the
duplexers before feeding the antennas.
If two transmitters are used in a branch, the coupler will be used in front of the
duplexer. This coupler is connected by an RF cable bridge.
The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals,
allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.
The AGC also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,
at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.
The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control,
remote DC feed and power splitters.
The AGC functions, interface, controller and power supply are given below.
Current Sense
3878V Power Module SDRAM FLASH + RI
Switch
12V 5V 3.3V
ADC
DEBUG1
DEBUG2
DC Ant A
DC Ant B
12V TMA A
SCP
12V TMA B
I2C
I2C
HFFI
HFFI
Synthesizer
RF
ACU ADC X
ANLU Receiver
A local synthesizer
Input MUX.
MicroBlaze System
HDLC Unit
BSII Multiplexer
HFFI Unit
Register Unit
I2C Unit
MikroBlaze System
I2C
BSII0 BSII IO
BSII1 HDLCU IO
MUX
ACU
ACU
REGU
HFFI CLKCLK2x/Fx
HFFI
BSII_CLK40M96
CRCU
CLK25M6 CLK_SDRAM
DOWN
CLKII_CLK26M
UP
CLK_SDRAMIN CLKII_WIN_PLL
BSII_WIN_PLL
10.4.4.6 Receiver
The front-end receiver is realized by one device, which includes a direct
conversion QPSK demodulator, the PLL and synthesizer. The downconverter
can handle receive frequency in the GSM, DCS or PCS band. Control data will
be entered by means of an I2C interface.
The RF signal from the LNA board is fed directly into the downconverter. The I/Q
baseband output signal of the downconverter is sampled and converted using a
dual sigma-delta ADC. The data output is serial at a word rate of 270.83kHz for
each I and Q. The ADC is interfaced by the Analog Control Unit (ACU).
Remote Power Interface (RPI), which controls the AGCC power supply and
supervises the signals of input and output voltages
ADR, Physical address from backpanel for RI ASIC address setting and for
SCP BSII address setting.
Baseband ADC
The Glue logic also controls the BSII frame clock PLL and the CLKII master
clock PLL with a clock edge control signal (see Figure 333 and Figure 334 ).
10.4.5.1 Voltages
The following table provides AGCPS input/output voltage parameters.
Voltage Value
+ 12 VDC +/-3 %
10.4.5.2 Fuse
The input of the AGCPS is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity.
10.4.5.3 Protection
The AGCPS circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarity
inversion on its inputs.
10.4.5.4 Grounding
Ground continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrack
backplane which connect to the bus bar ground.
12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V
10.4.6.1 LEDs
There are two LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of
the operational status of the AGC module. The following table describes each
LED and defines their various operational states.
On Module is switched on
10.4.6.2 Alarms
The AGC detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB
Alarm Conditions (83) .
Transmit band. 869 - 894 MHz 935 - 960 MHz 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880
MHz
Receive band. 824 - 849 MHz 890 - 915 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785
MHz
Bandwidth for each 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz
channel.
Isolation between transmit >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB
ports (A to B/ 1 to 2).
Insertion loss in transmit 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB
pass band without
combiner.
Insertion loss in transmit 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB
pass band with combiner.
Intermodulation products <-100 dBm <-100 dBm <-100 dBm <-100 dBm
at antenna port with 2x 28
W signals at one transmit
port and 50 on receive
port in receive band.
Intermodulation products <-36 dBm <-36 dBm <-36 dBm <-36 dBm
at antenna port with 2x 28
W signals at one transmit
port and 50 on receive
port in transmit band.
RF input impedance. 50 50 50 50
RF output impedance. 50 50 50 50
TX to RX isolation:
TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RX Atten (dB) without
gain RX gain
10.4.7.2 Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant
B
Compared to general perfomrance characteristics, the variant B has the
following specific values:
TX to RX isolation:
TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RX Atten (dB) without
gain RX gain
10.4.7.3 Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant
C
Compared to general perfomrance characteristics, the variant C has the
following specific values:
TX to RX isolation:
TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RX Atten (dB) without
gain RX gain
Antenna
Connector
TXAIN1
Transmitter
ANTA
Input Connectors
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
TXAIN2
RF bridge
(if TXAIN1 and/or
TXAIN TXAIN2 used)
Combined
Transmitter
RX0AOUT2 Output Connector
RX1AOUT2 TXAOUT (TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
Hot Surface
RX1BOUT2 Warning
Module RX0BOUT2
Extractor
TXBIN2
Receiver
Connectors
TXBIN TXBIN1
RX1BOUT1
RX0BOUT1
ON
LEDs
OM/ALARM
TXBOUT
High Voltage
Warning
ANTB
Antenna
Connector
TXAIN1
ANTA
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
Transmitter
TXAIN2 Input Connectors
Hot Surface
RF bridge
Warning
(if TXAIN1 and/or
TXAIN2 used)
Combined
Transmitter
RX0AOUT2 Output Connector
TXAOUT (TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
RX1AOUT2
TXAIN
RX1BOUT2
Module RX0BOUT2
Extractor
TXBIN2
TXBIN
Receiver
Connectors
TXBIN1
RX1BOUT1
RX0BOUT1
ON
LEDs
OM/ALARM
TXBOUT
High Voltage
Warning
ANTB
10.4.8.3 Connectors
The AGC has four transmitter input connectors and eight receiver output
connectors on its front panel. Therefore, one AGC module can be interfaced to
four TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.
The following table describes the AGC front panel connectors.
Connector Description
Connector Type
10.5 ANB
The ANB provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and the
antenna.
Its tasks are to:
Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where the
signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers
RX0AOUT1
RX0AOUT2 Splitter
RX1AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
ANCC
RX0BOUT1
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT1 Splitter
RX1BOUT2
Directional
TXAIN
Coupler A
Uplink Functions
RX0AOUT1 Duplexer ANTA
TRE A
RX0AOUT2
LNA
Filter
RX1AOUT1
RX1AOUT2 Power ANCC
Splitter A AN BSII
LEDs Microprocessor
BCB
Interface BCB
Remote
Switching
DC/DC
Power DC Feed Converter 48
Splitter B VDC
RX1BOUT1
RX1BOUT2
LNA
RX0BOUT1
TRE
RX0BOUT2 Duplexer ANTB
Uplink Functions B
TXBIN Directional
Coupler B
In each branch A and B, the RF signals pass the duplexers before feeding
the antennas.
The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals,
allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.
The ANB also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,
at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.
The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control,
remote DC feed and power splitters.
The following table describes the downlink and uplink functions, the interface,
the controller and the power supply for the ANB.
BTS Control Bus Interface The BCB Interface is located on the backplane.
It interfaces the data and control signals to the
BCB, as listed in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB,
BCB Interface (79) .
RF input impedance. 50 50
RF output impedance. 50 50
Transmitter
Input Connector
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
TXAIN
VSWRB
ALARM
ANTB
High Voltage
Warning
Antenna
Connector
ANTA
Module TXBIN
Extractor
O&M
LEDs
VSWRA
Receiver RX0BOUT1
Connectors
RX1BOUT1
Transmitter
Input Connector
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
VSWRB
ALARM
TXAIN
Antenna
Connector
ANTA ANTB
High Voltage
Warning
Transmitter
Input Connector
TXBIN
Module
Extractor
O&M
LEDs
VSWRA
Receiver RX0BOUT1
Connectors
RX1BOUT1
10.5.6.3 Connectors
The ANB has two transmitter input connectors and four receiver output
connectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANB module can be interfaced to
two TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.
The following table describes the ANB front panel connectors.
Connector Description
ANTA, ANTB 7/ 16
GSM UMTS
Antennas Antennas
A+B A+B
AB AB
ANCx ANRU
BTS Node B
GSM UMTS
850/900/1800
With the help of diplexer filters at both ends of the feeder cables, the GSM
(850/900/1800) band and the UMTS band can be decoupled in order to use the
same feeder cable for both services. The following figure shows the principle.
DoubleDiplexer
Diplexer B
Antennas A + B Antennas A + B
Diplexer A
GSM UMTS
Diplexer
DoubleDiplexer
AB AB
ANCx ANRU
Common Antenna Feeders
BTS Node B
GSM UMTS
850/900/1800
Diplexer
The insertion losses of the filters are as low as possible to achieve the best
noise figures in the uplink and low attenuation in the TX downlink.
GSM and UMTS bandpath filters provide following features:
Suppression of spurious and noise signals from the transmitter(s) out of
band
Isolation of the UMTS branch (GSM part) or GSM branch (UMTS part).
The following table shows the out-of-band attenuations of the diplexer filters.
Side View
RF Connector
DCS UMTS
ANT
Ground Connector
DCS UMTS
Bottom View
The diplexer has six RF connectors (7/16 female) for connecting GSM BTS,
UMTS BTS and antennas. A ground connector is available to connect the
diplexer to ground. Two mounting flanges are used to fix the diplexer to
immobile equipment near the BTSs.
11 Temperature Control
FANU
FACB
TFBP.
TFBP
FANU
FACB
Ribbon Cable
Connectors
Subrack
Backplane
FACB
FANU
Top FANUs
TREs
FANUs
Air Inlet
ANs
Air Inlet
TREs
FANUs
Air Inlet
Power Connector
Latch
Handle
Guide Rails
Parameter Description
The following figure shows the FACB architecture in block diagram form.
20 VDC to
38 VDC to Fuse Filtering 40 VDC
DC/DC Converter
72 VDC and Surge (Front Row)
Limiting
Input
RI Voltage Regulator
EEPROM Monitoring
FANUs
BCB
Interface Voltage Front Row Fans
FACB Controller Monitor and
Limiter
Backplane
Address Back Row Fans
Fan Speed
Regulator
DC/DC Converter
(Back Row)
20 VDC to
40 VDC
The FACB activates the fans within the temperature range: -40 C to + 70
C. However, at very low temperatures, in the range -40 C to -10 C, the fans
operate without digital speed control.
Backplane address
RI EEPROM.
11.1.2.2 Fuse
The input of the FACB is protected by a fuse with a high breaking capacity
(3.5 A).
Connector
Connector
Controller
11.1.2.6 Alarms
Two independent fan alarms, for the front and back rows, can be raised under
the control of the FACB. An alarm is raised when a fan-related output voltage
is out of tolerance. The following table lists the voltage threshold-tolerances
before an alarm is raised.
U Front 13 V 20 V
U Back 13 V 20 V
X117
Equipment X116
Label FACB X113
0V
Ground
Ribbon Cable Connector
48 VDC
X100
Pin 1, Row A
11.2 HEX2
HEX2 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It maintains the correct air
environment within the cabinets. The airflow within the cabinets is isolated from
the outside environment.
HEX2 is mounted on the inside of the compartment door. It cools the internal
air by transferring heat to the outside environment. The following figure shows
the main components of HEX2.
Temperature
Air Outlet Sensor
HEX2
Inner Fans
Warm Air Warm Air
Inlet Inlet
HEX2
Air Outlet
Heat Sink
Cassette
HEX2 Door
Mounting
on
Alternative Outer
Cabinet Compartment
Door
Subrack Subrack
Inner
Compartment
FANU FANU
Outer Fans
Cool Air Cool Air
Outlet Outlet
Air Inlet
Air Inlet
11.2.1 LED(s)
There are three versions of HEX2, two with only one LED and another one
with four LEDs, where the reason for the alarm is shown in more detail (but
only on the module itself):
Versions with one LED (versions ADAC, ADCA)
There is one LED on the front of the control box. It illuminates when
there is an alarm
Version with four LEDs (version ADBA)
There are the following four LEDs on the module:
High/Low Temp: Temperature sensor failure, inside temperature above
70 C or below -60 C
Heater: Heater failure (not used; not correlated to HEAT2)
Ext. Fan: External fan failure
Int. Fan: Internal fan failure.
Note that the alarm raised by HEX2 is only an accumulative alarm.
11.2.2 Alarms
HEX2 raises an alarm when:
A fan fails
11.2.3 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the two possible rear views of HEX2.
Equipment
Labels
Air
Outlet
Temperature
Sensor Connector
LEDs:
LED High/Low
Temp
Fan Fan Cables
Door Side Rear Side (Version ADCA) *) Rear Side (Version ADBA)
*) Version ADCA has only the left fan and internal cabling
11.2.4 Connectors
The following table describes the HEX2 control box connectors.
11.3 HEX3/HEX4
HEX3 and HEX4 are used in Multistandard BTS outdoor versions. They
maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air cooling is
not allowed in the outdoor BTSs. Therefore the airflow within the cabinets is
isolated from the outside environment.
HEX4 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1 door, HEX3 is mounted on the
inside of the MBOE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat to
the outside environment. The following figure shows the main components
of HEX3 and HEX4.
Temperature
Sensor Air Outlet
HEX3/4
HEX2
Heat Sink
Cassette
Door
Outer
Compartment
Subrack
Inner
Compartment
FANU
Outer Fan
Cool Air
Outlet
Air Inlet
HEX3 and HEX4 are boxes which are divided into inner and outer circuits by a
heat sink cassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive material
allowing heat exchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by one
blower in each circuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner
compartment by the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and
returned to the cabinet as cool air.
The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outside
environment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air is
drawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan.
11.3.3 Alarm
There is one alarm output per heat exchanger. An alarm is raised when:
11.3.4 LED
An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located on
the lid (inner circuit side).
The red LED is lit in case of an alarm.
11.3.6 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the HEX3/HEX4.
Note that the HEX3 and HEX4 only differ in width and weight.
Door Side Front Side
DCand Alarm
Connector
Fan LED
Air Inlet
(Protected with grid)
Air
Inlet* Air Outlet
(Protected with grid
Water if necessary)
Outlet Fan
Guiding tubes
for fixing bolts
11.3.7 Connectors
The following table describes the HEX3/HEX4 connectors.
Weight (kg) 24 28
11.4 HEX5
HEX5 is used in Compact BTS Outdoor (CBO) versions. It maintains the
correct air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air cooling is not allowed in
the outdoor BTSs. Therefore the air flow within the cabinets is isolated from
the outside environment.
HEX5 is mounted on the inside of the CBO door. It cools the internal air by
transferring heat to the outside environment. The following figure shows the
main components of HEX5.
Temperature
Sensor Air Outlet
HEX5
HEX2
1234
Inner
Compartment
FANU
Outer Fan
Cool Air
Outlet
Air Inlet
HEX5 is a box which is divided into inner and outer circuits by a heat sink
cassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive material allowing heat
exchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by one blower in each
circuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner compartment
by the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and returned
to the cabinet as cool air.
The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outside
environment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air is
drawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan.
11.4.3 Alarm
There is one alarm output per heat exchanger. An alarm is raised when:
11.4.4 LED
An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located on
the lid (inner circuit side):
11.4.6 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the rear views of HEX5.
Door Side Rear Side
Grill Guard
Equipment
Labels DC and Alarm
Connector
Test Connector
Water Outlet
11.4.7 Connectors
The following table describes the HEX5 connectors.
Parameter HEX5
Weight (kg) 13
11.5 HEX8/HEX9
HEX8 and HEX9 are used in Multistandard BTS Evolution outdoor versions.
They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air cooling
is not allowed in the outdoor BTSs. Therefore the airflow within the cabinets is
isolated from the outside environment.
HEX9 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1E door; HEX8 is mounted on the
inside of the MBOEE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat to
the outside environment. The following figure shows the main components
of HEX8 and HEX9.
Temperature
Sensor Air Outlet
HEX8/9
HEX2
Heat Sink
Cassette
Door
Outer
Compartment
Subrack
Inner
Compartment
FANU
Outer Fan
Cool Air
Outlet
Air Inlet
HEX8 and HEX9 are boxes which are divided into inner and outer circuits by a
heat sink cassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive material
allowing heat exchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by one
blower in each circuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner
compartment by the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and
returned to the cabinet as cool air.
The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outside
environment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air is
drawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan.
11.5.3 Alarm
There is one alarm output per heat exchanger. An alarm is raised when:
11.5.4 LED
An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located on
the lid (inner circuit side).
The red LED is lit in case of an alarm.
11.5.6 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the HEX8/HEX9.
Note that the HEX8 and HEX9 only differ in width and weight.
Door Side Front Side
DCand Alarm
Connector
Fan LED
Air Inlet
(Protected with grid)
Air
Inlet* Air Outlet
(Protected with grid
Water if necessary)
Outlet Fan
Guiding tubes
for fixing bolts
11.5.7 Connectors
The following table describes the HEX8/HEX9 connectors.
Weight (kg) 24 28
11.6 DAC8/DAC9
DAC8 and DAC9 are used in Multistandard BTS Evolution outdoor versions.
They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets using fresh
air cooling.
DAC9 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1E door, DAC8 is mounted on the
inside of the MBOEE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat to
the outside environment. The following figure shows the main components
of DAC8 and DAC9.
Air Outlet
DAC8/9
FANU FANU
Fan Subrack
Door
Air Inlet with
Filter Mat FANU FANU
Fresh Air
Channel
Fan Subrack
FANU FANU
Air Inlet
The DAC8 and DAC9 consists of metal boxes with an air inlet and an air outlet in
the front side as shown in Figure 360. In these cut-outs filter mats are mounted.
Compared to HEX system, where the air inside of the cabinet is separated
from ambient air, the DAC system uses fresh air to cool the equipment inside
of the cabinet.
The ambient air is drawn by fans through the hydrophobic filter mat and blown
into the BTS through cut-outs directly below the subracks. There it arises to the
top of the BTS and leaves it by the air outlet. The air outlet is protected against
intrusion of water and insects by a filter mat and an additional fly screen.
11.6.4 Alarm
There is one alarm output per cooling unit. An alarm is raised when:
11.6.5 LED
An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located on
the lid (inner circuit side).
The red LED is lit in case of an alarm.
11.6.7 RS232
The RS232 port allows the connection of an external terminal to readout
the fan speed..
11.6.8 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the DAC8/DAC9.
Note that the DAC8 and HEX9 only differ in width and weight.
Door Side Front Side
Equipment Labels
Air Outlet
Fan
Air Outlet
Air Barrier
Air Inlet with
Air Outlet
Filter Mat
Fan
Air Outlet
11.6.9 Connectors
The following table describes the DAC8/DAC9 connectors.
Weight (kg) 18 22
11.7 HEAT2
HEAT2 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It
switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls below
a predefined value.
HEAT2 is an electro-mechanical assembly fitted to the floor, the side wall or
beneath the HEX4 (MBO1) of each compartment in the outdoor 9100 BTS.
The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
Internal
Thermostat
External
Thermostat
10 Fan
AA Variant:
600 W
CA Variant:
950 W
Heater
X1 X2 (Variant AA only)
The 230 VAC supply enters HEAT2 at connector X1. From there, it is routed
to the heater and fan (via connector X2 in the case of variant AA). If, in the
case of variant AA, another HEAT2 is fitted, its AC supply is provided by the
socket which is part of connector X2.
The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10 C.
The switch completes the circuit for the AC supply to the heater and fan. The
fan blows air through the heating elements of the heater.
The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. If the temperature of the
heater assembly exceeds 90 C, the thermostat within the heater assembly
opens a switch. This breaks the AC circuit to the heater elements.
11.7.1 Appearance
The HEAT2 has two variants: variant AA and variant CA. Each variant is
shown separately.
11.7.1.1 Variant AA
The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT2 variant AA.
Heater Assembly
External
Thermostat
Connector X2
Fan Connector X1
Side View
Grille
Screw
Temperature Adjuster
Top View
11.7.1.2 Variant CA
The following figure shows the side and top view of HEAT2 variant CA.
Grid
Connector X1
Heater
Fan
Thermostat
(Thermostat fixed at
10 oC with safety
varnish)
Angle Side View
Connection
Cable L = 800 m
Connection
Area
Label High
Voltage DIN/
ISO 3864 (Size
20 mm)
Equipment Labels
Top View
11.7.2 Connectors
The following table describes the HEAT2 connectors.
Connector Description
11.8 HEAT3
HEAT3 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS Compact versions.
It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls below
a predefined value.
HEAT3 is an electrical assembly fitted between the bottom plate of the
Compact BTS Outdoor and the lowest subrack. The following figure shows
the circuit schematic.
Integral
Temperature
Limiter
External
Thermostat
10 C
500 W
Heater
X1
L
PE
N
11.8.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT3.
Connector X1
Heater Plate
Heating Mat
Labels
11.8.2 Connectors
The following table describes the HEAT3 connectors.
Connector Description
11.9 HEAT4
HEAT4 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS Compact versions.
It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls below
a predefined value.
HEAT4 is an electrical assembly fitted between the bottom plate of the
Compact BTS Outdoor and the lowest subrack. The following figure shows
the circuit schematic.
11.9.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT4.
Power
Connector
Heating Mat
Heater Plate
Labels
11.9.2 Connectors
The following table describes the HEAT4 connectors.
Connector Description
11.10 HEATDC
HEAT DC is an electrical air heater used in DC 9100 MBS GSM outdoor
versions. It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls
below + 10 C.
HEAT DC is an electro-mechanical assembly fitted to the side wall or beneath
the HEX4 (MBO1) of each compartment in the DC 9100 MBS GSM outdoor.
The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
The - 48 VDC supply enters HEAT2 at connector X1. From there, it is routed to
the heater and fan.
The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10 C.
The switch completes the circuit for the DC supply to the heater and fan. The
fan blows air through the heating elements of the heater.
The heater is protected by an internal temperature limiter in the case of
fan failure. If the temperature of the heater assembly exceeds 110 C, the
temperature limiter opens a switch. This breaks the DC circuit to the heater
elements.
11.10.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the side and top views of HEATDC.
Grid
Heater
Air flow
Fan
Angle
Side View
Connector X1
Top View
11.10.2 Connectors
The following table describes the HEATDC connectors.
Connector Description
12.1 ACIB
The ACIB is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It distributes its AC input to
five output connectors. The five output connectors provide the AC power
source for the PM08s.
The ACIB is housed in the SRACDC. It distributes 230 VAC to the five PM08s.
If the temperature in the ACIB falls below a predefined level, the AC supply
to the PM08s is automatically switched off. The following figure shows the
circuit schematic.
Output
1 /3
PE
N PM08/1
L1/L3
PE
N PM08/2
L1/L3
PE
N PM08/3
L1/L2
Input
Relay
1 /3 PE
L1/L3 N PM08/4
L1/L2
L1/L2
PE
N PM08/5
L1/L1
L1/L1
20
Temperature Sensor
N
PE PE = Permanent Earth
The ACIB input connector is connected to the ACSB where provision is made
for 1 or 3 operation.
If the cabinet AC supply is:
230 VAC 1 - each of the three live wires in the input connector receives the
same, single phase L1. The PM08s connected to the output connectors
also receive the phase L1.
400 VAC 3 - each of the three live wires in the input connector receives
a different phase, L1, L2 or L3. The PM08s connected to the output
connectors share the L1, L2 and L3 phases, as shown in the above figure.
The AC input is connected to the five AC outputs via a relay which is controlled
by a temperature sensor. When the temperature is above -20 C, the AC input
is connected to the five AC output connectors.
If the temperature is below -20 C when the 9100 BTS is first switched on, there
is no AC supply to the PM08s. This means that the 0/ -48 VDC supply is not
available and the 9100 BTS cannot operate. However, AC power is available
to the HEAT2s.
When the HEAT2s raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20 C, the
relay is activated and the DC supplies are produced. The HEAT2s prevent the
internal cabinet temperature from falling to -20 C thereafter.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0 C, the SUMP switches on
the telecommunications modules and the 9100 BTS becomes operational.
Warning
Label
AC In
Equipment
Labels
AC Out 3
2 1
12.1.2 Connectors
The following table describes the ACIB front panel connectors.
Connector Description
AC In Provides a 230 VAC 1 or 400 VAC 3 input.
AC Out 1- 5 Provides 230 VAC 1 outputs for the five PM08s.
12.2 LPFC
The LPFC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor cabinets.
Its functions are:
Line filtering.
Lightning Protectors
AC Line Filter
AC in Terminals
L L
N N
PE PE
Metal Box
Bolt M6
Recess
in cover
Equipment
Handle Labels
LPFC Cover
AC Mains In
Bolt M8
for GND
12.3 LPFMT
The LPFMT is used in multistandard BTS outdoor tropical cabinets.
Its functions are:
Connection of AC mains to the BTS
Line filtering.
Lightning Protectors
AC Line Filter
AC in Terminals
L L
N N
PE PE
Metal Box
Bolt M6
The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet is supplied with 230 VAC 1phase.
The LPFMT is mounted on the left upper side of the MBO1T cabinet. The cover
of the LPFMT has a window which allows checking the lightning protection
modules without removing the cover.
The following figure shows the LPFMT top view.
ACout to ACMUT
LPFCT
L
Recess
in cover
Information,
Equipment
and Warning
Bolt M6
Lables
for GND
12.4 LPFM
The LPFM is used in multistandard BTS outdoor cabinets.
Its functions are:
Line filtering.
Lightning Protectors
AC Line Filter
AC in Terminals
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
N N
PE PE
Metal Box
Bolt M6
The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet can be supplied with 230 VAC 1
or 400 VAC 3.
If the cabinet AC supply is:
400 VAC 3 - each of the three live wires at the AC In terminals receives a
different phase, L1, L2 or L3.
The LPFM is mounted on the left upper side of the MBO1 cabinet. The cover
of the LPFM has a window which allows checking the lightning protection
modules without removing the cover.
The following figure shows the LPFM top view.
L3
L2
L1
Recess
in cover
Information,
Equipment
and Warning
Bolt M6
Lables
for GND
12.5 LPFU
The LPFU is used in outdoor 9100 BTS configurations.
Its functions are:
Line filtering.
The following figure shows the block diagram of version AA (three phases).
Lightning Protectors
AC Line Filter
AC in Terminals
L3 L3
L2 L2
L1 L1
N N
PE PE
Metal Box
Bolt M6
The outdoor BTS can be supplied with 230 VAC 1 or 400 VAC 3.
If the cabinet AC supply is:
400 VAC 3 - each of the three live wires at the AC In terminals receives a
different phase, L1, L2 or L3.
The following figure shows the LPFU top view with its cover removed.
Glands
PE
AC in N
Terminals 1
2
PG29 PG16 3
L1
L2
Lightning
Protectors L3
N
AC Filter
3 phases
Bolt M6
Figure 380: LPFU Version AA, Top View (with Cover Removed)
12.6 ACDUE
The AC Distribution Unit is used for MBO1E cabinets.
The ACDUE contains:
AC line filtering
Surge protectors
Overcurrent protection devices
Parameter ACDUE
12.7 ACMU
The ACMU is used in multistandard BTS outdoor configurations.
Its functions are:
Temperature Sensor
N distributed to
20
all modules
Circuit Breakers K1
F5 L1
L1 to PM12/1
AC Mains In
F4 L2
L2 to PM12/2
3 Phase
ACMains
Connection F3 L3
L3 to PM12/3
F2 L2
to Heat2/Airc.
L3
to Service Light
F1 and AC Power
N Socket
PE distributed to
PE
all modules
Warning
Label
Equipment
BTS HEATING SERVICE + LIGHT Label
L1 L2 L3
F5 F4 F3 F2 F1
Warning
Label
12.8 ACMUT
The ACMUT is used in multistandard BTS outdoor tropical configurations.
Its functions are:
Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters and air conditioning
PE distributed to
PE all modules
L1
F5
12.9 ACSU
The ACSU is used in outdoor 9100 BTS configurations.
Its functions are:
Temperature Sensor
N
20 distributed to all
modules
Circuit Breakers
L1 to PM12/1
L1
AC Mains In
L2 to PM12/2
3 Phase L2
ACMains
Connection to PM12/3
L3
L3
L1 to Heat2/Airc.
L2 to Heat2/Airc.
L3 to Heat2/Airc.
L1 to Service Light
and AC Power
Socket
PE
PE distributed to all
modules
F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1
12.10 ACUC
The ACUC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor (CBO) configurations.
Its functions are:
F4
1
V=10 C
2
F1 F2 F3
PE N L L PE N N L PE
L N
N L
1 2 3 4 5 6 X21 7 8 9
X1 X2 X3 L N X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9
AC Mains In PE
1 Phase PE
AC Mains N
Connection L
N PE L N PE L N PE L
TO PM12 TO HEAT3
12.11 APOD
The APOD is used in indoor 9100 BTS versions that use an AC power supply. It
distributes its AC input to five output connectors. The five output connectors
provide the AC power source for the PM08s. The DC output from the PM08s is
then distributed to the subracks and other equipment by the APOD.
The APOD is housed in the ASIB. It distributes 230 VAC to the five PM08s. The
DC supply produced by the PM08s is connected to the remaining modules
in the cabinet via the circuit breakers located on the APOD, as shown in
the following figure.
N
Input 1
PE
DC Circuit Breakers
6
INT
5
Subrack 4
4
Subrack 3
48 VDC
3
Subrack 2
1
EXT
0 VDC PE
DC Bus
DC Output
Circuit
Breakers AC Input
Circuit
Breaker
Equipment
Labels
3
AC Output 1
Cables to PM08s
2
12.11.2 Connectors
The following table describes the APOD front panel connectors.
Connector Description
12.12 PM08
PM08 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It converts the AC input voltage
to provide DC power for the cabinet equipment.
Control
ACIB
Alarms
0 VDC
48 VDC
DC Bus
The BCU1 performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM08s.
Alarm Collection The PM08 raises alarms for both Mains power
failure and power module failure.
The alarm is collected by the BCU1. For more
information on alarms, refer to PM08 Electrical
Characteristics (Section 12.12.2) .
Input Parameter
Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Note: The PM08 can be operated at 110 VAC if the output power is limited to 500 W.
12.12.2.2 Fuses
Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM08 are protected by fast acting
10 A fuses. The fuses are accessed by removing protective caps on the
modules front panel.
Output Parameter
o
Nominal output voltage at 20 C. -54.5 VDC
Dynamic response. 2 ms
Note: If the BCU1 fails or is not fitted, the PM08 produces an output of -52 VDC
(+/-0.25 V). If batteries are not fitted, the default voltage is produced at all times.
Output Parameter
Minimum I out 0A
Maximum I out 19 A
AC In
Connector
Fuses
Labels
Status LED
Handle
Off Fault.
Red Fault.
12.12.3.2 Connectors
The only PM08 front panel connector is AC In, an IEC 320 connector for coded
conditions, where the 230 VAC input cable from the ACIB is plugged in.
12.13 PM11
The PM11 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions where the ACSR is employed.
PM11 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinet
equipment.
AC Input
ACSB
Control
Alarms
0 VDC
48 VDC
DC Bus
The BCU2 performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM11s.
Control PM11 outputs are connected to the ACSR backplane DC Bus and
monitored by the BCU2. When the output voltage changes because of
a changed load, the PM11s automatically compensate for the change.
The BCU2 controls the overall output voltage of the PM11s. The
nominal -48 V output is typically -54.5 V at 20 C. During battery
charging, the BCU2 changes the output voltage within the range -52
V to -57 V. During battery testing, the output voltage can be reduced
to -44 V.
The DC Bus provides DC power to the BOBU and the BU41 or BU100,
via the BAC2.
Alarm Collection The PM11 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and power
module failure. The alarm is collected by the BCU2.
For more information on alarms, refer to PM11 Electrical Characteristics
(Section 12.13.2) .
Input Parameter
Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Note: The PM11 can be operated at 110 VAC if the output power is limited to 500 W.
12.13.2.2 Fuses
Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM11 are protected by fast acting
10 A fuses. The fuses are accessed by removing protective caps on the
modules front panel.
Output Parameter
o
Nominal output voltage at 20 C. -54.6 VDC
Dynamic response. 2 ms
Note: If the BCU2 fails or is not fitted, the PM11 produces an output of -52 VDC
(+/-0.25 V). If batteries are not fitted, the default voltage is produced at all times.
Output Parameter
Minimum I out 0A
Maximum I out 24 A
Status LED
Handle
Labels
Fuses
LED
State Description
Off Fault.
12.14 PM12
The PM12 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinet
equipment. The PM12 is used in indoor and outdoor 9100 BTS versions
where the SUMA is employed.
Two to four PM12s (PM12/1 - PM12/4) are fitted in parallel with load sharing
(see Figure 246 or MBO1/MBO2 AC/DC Power Supply System (247) )
controlled by a local sharing bus.
The OMU performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM12s.
Alarm Collection The PM12 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and power
module failure. The alarm is collected by the OMU.
For more information on alarms, refer to PM12 Electrical Characteristics
(Section 12.14.2) .
Input Parameter
Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
12.14.2.2 Fuses
Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM12 are protected by fast acting 10 A
fuses. The fuses are accessed by removing the cover of the module.
Output Parameter
o
Nominal output voltage at 20 C -54.5 VDC (in case of Ucell =2.27V)
Dynamic response 2 ms
Output Parameter
Minimum I out 0A
Maximum I out 24 A
AC In
Connector
Status LED ON
Equipment
Handle Labels
LED
State Description
Off Fault.
12.15 PM18
The PM18 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinet
equipment. PM18 are used in outdoor BTS or MBS.
It consists of the subrack PM18SR which contains a control unit PM18C, up
to 3 rectifier PM18R and a temperature sensor.
Each rectifier has an output power of 1800 W. The PM18C controls the power
modules and handles the alarm reporting to the SUMU via XBCB and RS232.
The battery management is done by the PM18C internally of the power supply
without any control functions of the SUMA.
Input PM18
Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Output PM18
o
Nominal output voltage at 20 C -52.5 VDC ... -54VDC
Dynamic response 50 ms
12.15.2 LEDs
12.15.2.1 PM18SR
The PM18SR from Cherokee has a single LED on it.
The PM18C from H+S has two LEDs on its front panel.
The following table shows the LED states for the H+S PM18C.
AC OK Green ON AC voltage OK
DC OK Green ON DC voltage OK
12.15.3 Fuses
Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM18 are protected by fuses.
PM Fuses
The fuses are accessed by removing the protective caps on the modules
front panel.
Alarm
ON
Battery
Connectors
Battery
Temp. Sensor
Breaker
Fault ON
RS232 +
Load
Connectors
XBCB
Fault ON
Mains
Connectors
Fault ON
LVD
ON
Battery
Breaker
12.15.6 Weight
PM Weight
12.16 BCU1
The BCU1 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It controls the DC output
voltage and battery operation.
Control
Alarms
XBCB
ACRI
PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
V
0 VDC
Shunt
48 VDC
DC Bus
V
Shunt
BACO
SRACDC
BU41
The BCU1 connects to the PM08s, ACRI and BACO via the SRACDC
backplane. The voltages across the shunt resistors provide the BCU1 with a
measurement of the currents drawn. BU41 contains up to two battery groups
which are referred to as branches. Each branch provides -48 VDC.
The functions performed are:
PM08 control
Alarm supervision
Battery management.
AC power failure
PM08 failure
Battery malfunction
BCU1 fault.
For more details of the alarm information, refer to BCU1 LEDs, LCD, Alarms
and Buttons (Section 12.16.2) .
12.16.2.1 LEDs
The following table describes the front panel LEDs.
12.16.2.2 LCD
The BCU1 has an LCD on its front panel (see Figure 401 ). Information is
viewed using the front panel [ Function ] and [ Status ] buttons to scroll through
several display options.
The LCD provides two rows of alphanumeric information where each row
consists of eight characters. The first row displays a message and the second
row displays associated parameters or choices.
12.16.2.3 Alarms
The BCU1 collects alarms and reports them to the ACRI. The following table
describes the alarms.
BCU1 Fault The internal reference voltage used by the BCU1 has
failed.
Battery Malfunction The identity number of the battery branch that failed is
reported. A battery malfunction occurs if:
Battery temperature.
Refer to the 9100 BTS/9110 Micro BTS Corrective Maintenance Handbook for
more information about how to use the special menu facility.
Status LEDs
On Test Bat.
LCD Display
12.17 BCU2
The BCU2 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions where the ACSR is employed.
It:
Control
Alarms
XBCB
PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2
V
0 VDC
Shunt
48 VDC
DC Bus
V
Shunt
BAC2
ACSR
BU41 or
BU100
BCU2 connects to the PM11s and BAC2 via the ACSR backplane. The
voltages across the shunt resistors provide BCU2 with a measurement of the
currents drawn. BU41 contains up to two battery groups and BU100 contains
one battery group. These battery groups are referred to as branches. Each
branch provides -48 VDC.
The functions performed are:
PM11 control
Alarm supervision
Battery management
AC power failure
PM11 failure
Battery malfunction
BCU2 fault.
For more alarm information, refer to BCU2 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons
(Section 12.17.2) .
12.17.2.1 LEDs
The following table describes the front panel LEDs.
OFF Otherwise.
12.17.2.2 LCD
The BCU2 has an LCD on its front panel (see Figure 403 ). Information is
viewed using the front panel [ Function ] and [ Status ] buttons to scroll through
several display options.
The LCD provides one row of alphanumeric information where the row consists
of eight characters.
12.17.2.3 Alarms
The BCU2 collects alarms and reports them to the OMU on the SUMP. The
alarms are described in the following table.
BCU2 Fault The internal reference voltage used by the BCU2 has
failed.
Fan Status The status of the two FANUs located below the ACSR.
Battery Malfunction The identity number of the battery branch that failed is
reported. A battery malfunction occurs if:
The battery was automatically disconnected
because of a malfunction during charging
Battery temperature.
Refer to the 9100 BTS/9110 Micro BTS Corrective Maintenance Handbook for
more information about how to use the special menu facility.
Status LEDs
On Test Bat.
LCD Display
Control Buttons
Function Status
RS232
Handle
Power ON
XBCB
Connector
Temperature
Connector
12.17.4 Connectors
The following table describes the BCU2 front panel connectors.
Connector Description
XBCB Provides a:
12.18 BACO
The BACO is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It interconnects the batteries
and the DC outputs of the PM08s.
The BACO contains:
DC Bus
BATOUT+
Shunt
48 VDC nom.
K1
BATOUT
Branch 1 RELBATT1
UBATT
48 VDC nom.
K2
To
BCU1
Branch 2 RELBATT2
Sensor Signals
Temperature
Sensor
Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the batteries during battery
maintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically when the
current drawn exceeds 60 A.
During an AC mains failure, BU41 provides battery power to the DC bus via
relays K1 and K2, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge becomes
excessive, BCU1 deactivates the relays to isolate the batteries. Relays K1
and K2 are controlled by the signals RELBATT1 and RELBATT2, respectively.
During battery charging and discharging, the relays operate simultaneously.
During battery testing, they operate independently.
Equipment
Labels
Warning
Label
Battery
Connection
Cables
12.18.2 Connectors
The following table describes the BACO connectors.
Connector Description
12.19 BAC2
The BAC2 is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It interconnects the batteries
and the DC outputs of the PM08s or PM11s.
The BAC2 contains:
Circuit Breakers
BATOUT+ DC Bus
Shunt
48 VDC nom.
K1
BATOUT
Branch 1 RELBATT1
UBATT
48 VDC nom.
K2
To
Branch 2 RELBATT2 BCU2
(BU41 only)
Sensor Signals
Temperature
Sensor
Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the batteries during battery
maintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically when the
current drawn exceeds 60 A.
During an AC mains failure, BU41 or BU100 provides battery power to the
DC bus via relays K1 and K2, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge
becomes excessive, BCU2 deactivates the relays to isolate the batteries.
Relays K1 and K2 are controlled by the signals RELBATT1 and RELBATT2,
respectively. During battery charging and discharging, the relays operate
simultaneously. During battery testing, they operate independently.
Camloc
Fastener
AC Mains
and Battery
Breakers
Equipment
Labels
Battery
Connection
Cables
12.19.2 Connectors
The following table describes the BAC2 connectors.
Connector Description
12.20 ABAC
The ABAC is used in indoor 9100 BTS versions that use an AC power supply. It
interconnects the batteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s.
The ABAC contains:
DC Bus
BATOUT+
Shunt
48 VDC nom.
K1
BATOUT
Branch 1 RELBATT1
UBATT
To
BCU1
Sensor Signals
Temperature
Sensor
Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the battery branch during
battery maintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically
when the current drawn exceeds 60 A.
During an AC mains failure, BU41 or BU100 provides battery power to the DC
bus via relay K1, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge becomes
excessive, the BCU1 deactivates the relay to isolate the battery branch. Relay
K1 is controlled by the signal RELBATT1.
+
Equipment
Labels
Battery
Connection
Cables
12.20.2 Connectors
The following table describes the ABAC connectors.
Connector Description
12.21 ADAM
ADAM is used in the AC/DC power supply of 9100 BTS configurations as the
interface between the PM12s, the batteries and the power distribution inside
the BTS.
ADAM consists of:
A small backpanel with the connectors for three PM12s and a terminal
for the wiring of the BTS.
ADAM
PM12
48 VDC 48 VDC
Subracks Subracks
0VDC 0VDC
48 VDC 48 VDC
Battery Battery
OMU
(SUMA)
Relay Control
PM12/1
Battery
Shunt
PM12/2
Signals
PM12/3
The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches the
lower limit, the relay separates the -48 VDC line of the battery. The relay has its
own control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.
12.21.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM.
12.21.3 Connectors
On the backpanel there are three connectors for the PM12s. Each of them
contains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC and
one for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.
On the front panel there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks
(via BOBU/BOMU/BOSU) and the back-up battery.
12.22 ADAM2
ADAM2 is used in the AC/DC power supply of Compact BTS Outdoor
configurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and the
power distribution inside the BTS.
ADAM2 consists of:
A small backpanel with the connectors for two PM12s and terminal for the
wiring of the BTS.
ADAM2
PM12
48 VDC 48 VDC
Subracks Subracks
0VDC 0VDC
48 VDC 48 VDC
Battery Battery
OMU
(SUMA)
Relay Control
Battery
Shunt
PM12/1
Signals
PM12/2
The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches the
lower limit (42 V), the relay separates the DC line of the battery. The relay has
its own control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.
12.22.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM2.
0V
BATT.
48V
48V
12.22.3 Connectors
On the backpanel there are two connectors for the PM12s. Each of them
contains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC and
one for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.
On the front panel, there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks
(via DCUC) and the back-up battery.
12.23 ADAM4
ADAM4 is used in the AC/DC power supply of 9100 BTS MBO1/MBO2
configurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and the
power distribution inside the BTS. ADAM4 is installed in combination with two
to four PM12s. If less than four PM12s are installed, the empty PM12 slot is
covered by a dummy panel.
ADAM4 consists of:
An air permeable metal frame, mounted in two third of a STASR above the
PM12s (see the following figure)
A small backpanel with the connectors for four PM12s and terminal for the
wiring of the BTS.
ADAM4
PM12
48 VDC 48 VDC
Subracks Subracks
0VDC 0VDC
0VDC 0VDC
Battery Battery
48 VDC 48 VDC
OMU
(SUMA)
Relay Control
PM12/1
Battery
Shunt
PM12/2
Signals
PM12/3
PM12/4
The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches the
lower limit, the relay separates the -48 VDC line of the battery. The relay has its
own control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.
12.23.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM4.
12.23.3 Connectors
On the backpanel, there are two connectors for the PM12s. Each of them
contains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC and
one for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.
On the front panel, there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks
(via BOMU) and the back-up battery.
12.24 BU41
The BU41 is an optional feature used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It provides
an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mains supply failure.
The principal components of BU41 are four high performance, sealed, lead-acid
batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They connect in series to
provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch. Optionally, a
second branch of four sealed lead-acid batteries can be fitted to double the
backup period. Each battery branch is independently connected to the BACO
or BAC2. Note however, that only one battery branch can be connected to
an ABAC or ADAM.
When two battery branches are used, both branches must consist of batteries
of the same type and capacity. This is required because the charging and
testing circuits assume both branches are the same.
Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. This
monitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by
the BCU1/SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery
overheating.
Each battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge to
the external environment the gasses produced during battery charging.
12.24.1 Charging
The BU41 charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)
standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit for the
number of battery branches in use.
40 Ah 6A 12 A
The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus battery
temperature.
0 C 2.3773 57.05
5 C 2.3484 56.36
Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of
2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20 C.
Equipment Labels
Vent Tube
Front View
Top View
Exhausting
Nipple
Equipment
Exhausting Lables
Tube
Upper Block
Warning Lables
Internal Supplier
Battery Information
Cable Lable
+ +
Battery Box
(Part of BTS)
Lower Block
+ +
Front View
12.25 BU100
The BU100 is an optional feature used in all outdoor 9100 BTS versions and in
indoor versions that use an AC power supply. It provides an emergency DC
power source for use in the event of a mains supply failure.
The principal components of the BU100 are four high performance, sealed,
lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They connect
in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch.
The battery branch is connected to the BACO, BAC2, ABAC or ADAM as
appropriate.
Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. This
monitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by the
BCU1, BCU2 or SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent
battery overheating.
The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge the
gasses produced during battery charging to the external environment.
12.25.1 Charging
The BU100 charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)
standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.
100 Ah 12 A
The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus battery
temperature.
0 C 2.3773 57.05
5 C 2.3484 56.36
Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of
2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20 C.
Top View
Vent Tube
12.26 BU101
The BU101 is an optional feature used in Multistandard Outdoor BTS Cabinets.
It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mains
supply failure.
The principal components of the BU101 are four high performance, sealed,
lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They are
connected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a
branch. The battery branch is connected to ADAM or ADAM4.
Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. This
monitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by the
SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.
The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge the
gases produced during battery charging to the external environment.
12.26.1 Charging
The BU101 charging characteristics conform to the IEC 896-2 standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.
100 Ah 12 A
The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus battery
temperature.
0 C 2.3773 57.05
5 C 2.3484 56.36
Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of
2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20 C.
Exhausting
Nipple
Exhausting
Tube
Battery Battery
Connection Cable
Upper Block
Equipment
Lables
To Circuit Breaker
Temperature
Sensor
Jumper
Battery Box
(Part of BTS)
Battery Battery
Jumper
Lower Block
Warning Lables
Exhausting
Tube
Supplier
Information
Lable
12.27 BU102
The BU102 is an optional feature used in External Battery Cabinets Outdoor.
It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mains
supply failure.
The principal components of the BU102 are four high performance, sealed,
gel batteries. They are connected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. power
source, referred to as a branch. The battery branch is connected to ADAM4 in
a BTS cabinet.
A temperature sensor is connected to one of the 0 V battery terminal. This
monitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by the
SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.
The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes divert the
gases produced during battery charging to the external environment.
12.27.1 Charging
The BU102 charging characteristics conform to the IEC 896-2 standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.
The following table shows the charging voltage versus battery temperature in
the case of default setting 2.29 V/ cell.
0 C 2.38 57.125
5 C 2.3587 56.616
I To combiner
From Baseband Modulator
ENCT Modulator &
Upconverter Duplexer
Q
TX Driver TX Power
BBTX Amplifier Amplifier
Transmitter part
Cleanup
Reveiver part Oscillator
TEPAxx/
TEPADHE
IF RF
ADC Filter Mixer LNA RX0
RX
Synth.
To DEM 1
on TRED DDC DRCS From Antenna
Network
RX
Synth.
2
IF RF
ADC Filter Mixer LNA RX1
TREA
12.28 BATS
The small battery BATS is a plug-in unit for the subrack STASR with a width of
28 TE. It is used in indoor cabinets. It provides an emergency DC power source
for use in the event of a mains supply failure. It contains:
Temperature sensor
Battery breaker.
+ + + +
Batteries
RIBATS
Feed
Through
Clamps
+ to BCB
48 V
to ADAM
12.28.1 Batteries
The batteries are connected in series and have nominal 48 V and a capacity of
8 Ah. A BATS can be plugged in any unused subrack position.
The principal components of BATS are four high performance, sealed, lead-acid
batteries that conform to the IEC 896-2 standard. They are connected in series
to provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch. The DC clamps
of the module are connected to the battery clamps on the front side of ADAM.
12.28.2 Charging
The BATS charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)
standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.
8 Ah 2A
The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus battery
temperature.
0 C 2.3773 57.05
5 C 2.3484 56.36
Note: In order to avoid excessive battery gas leakage from the battery, the charging
voltage must not exceed 2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20 C.
12.28.4 RIBATS
The RIBATS is a small PCB mounted on the BATS frame. It collects the value of
the temperature sensor and transfers this information to the OMU via the BCB.
It is directly connected to a backplane connector of the STASR. The RIBATS is
supplied from the BTS via the BCB, not from the batteries.
Cicuit
Breaker
DC Clamps
Alcatel
Product
Identification
Serial
Number
Identification
Module
Extractor
12.29 RIBAT
The RIBAT board is part of the battery. Its task is to measure the battery
temperature and to provide the OMU with the temperature value and the
battery Remote Inventory information which includes the information about the
battery type. Knowledge of the temperature value is necessary for charging.
The board contains a BCB interface to transfer the information. Depending on
the configuration, different interfaces are used: the BCB/EBCB, XBCB.
The RIBAT is supplied from the BTS, not from the batteries. The power
consumption is about 100 mA.
detect BCB/
Internal External
EBCB Con
Addressing Addressing
nection
BCB/
EBCB
NGTSL
Control
Logic
D
XBCB IN
A
RS
485 RI
TTL EEPROM
Line
term.
Loop BCB IF
to cascaded
XBCB Out RIBAT
Temperature
Sensor
12.29.3 Appearance
The RIBAT is a small board with a C96 connector for the flat band cable, a
Sub-D 9 connector for the temperature sensor and two Sub-D 15 connectors
for the XBCB input and output. The following figure shows the top view.
The temperature sensor is mounted on one pole of the batteries to give a
good thermal contact.
XBCB Connectors
used in case of EBCB Connector
external batteries used in case of
internal batteries
12.30 DCDP
The DCDP is used in outdoor 9100 BTS versions. It distributes -48 VDC to the
equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by its own circuit
breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCDP is housed in BTS compartment 1 above the top STASR. The
following figure shows the circuit schematic.
0 V Input 48V Input
Line
Load
X1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
15 A 15 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A
XIOB X1 1 6
Optional
X2 1 6
Equipment
Optional
Equipment X3 1 6
Optional
Equipment X4 1 6
Spare X5 1 6
Heat Exchanger 1 X6
Heat Exchanger 2 X7
Heat Exchanger 3 X8
Subrack 1/1 X9
Spare or
Subrack 1/3 X11
The DCDP 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output
connectors, via six circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
15 A for F1, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optional
equipment (such as microwave or termination of network line equipment)
15 A for F2, which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers
The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCDP and connected to each output
connector.
X6 X7 X8
Red 0 V
Blue 48 V
Top View
Connector Description
X5 Spare.
Connector Description
12.31 DCDU
The DCDU is used in Compact BTS Outdoor DC versions. It distributes -48
VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by
its own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCUC is housed in the BTS compartment above the cable entry. The
following figure shows the circuit schematic.
0V Rail
48V Rail
The DCDU 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output
connectors, via six circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
70 A for F1, which supplies the complete BTS and is the main breaker
25 A for F2 and F3, which supply the connectors for the STASRs.
15 A for F4, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optional
equipment (such as microwave or termination of network lines equipment)
15 A for F5, which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers
The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCUC and connected to each output
connector.
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10
BTS
70 A
Equipment Labels
Connector Description
12.32 DCDUE
The DCDUE is used in DC 9100 MBS GSM Evolution Outdoor versions. It
distributes -48 VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current
protected by its own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCDUE is housed in the left side of the BTS compartment. The following
figure shows the circuit schematic.
The DCDUE 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output
connectors, via four circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
12.33 DCMU
The DCMU is used in DC 9100 MBS GSM Outdoor versions. It distributes -48
VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by
its own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCMU is housed in the left side of the BTS compartment. The following
figure shows the circuit schematic.
EXTERNAL DC IN
48V 0V
MBO ROOF
0V BOLT 0V BOLT
C1 0V
BUSBAR CONNECTION
X9
48V
F1 F2 F3 F4
15A
15A
15A
70A
K1 K2
48V
48V
48V
F5
0V
0V
0V
DC IN / 48V
DC IN / 48V
DC OUT / 48V
DC OUT / 48V
1
X20
X21
Main ground
2
_ + _
X6
X4
X7
X8
X2
X3
X5
+ _ _ +
X1
1 2 + 1 2
The DCMU 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output
connectors, via four circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCMU.
Equipment Labels
BTS SERVICE HEATING 1 HEATING 2
LIGHT
F1 F2 F3 F4
Front View
Side View
12.34 DCUC
The DCUC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor versions. It distributes -48 VDC to
the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by its own
circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCUC is housed in the BTS compartment above the ACUC. The following
figure shows the circuit schematic.
0V Rail
0V Input
48 V Rail
48V Input
25A 25A 15A 15A
F1 F2 F3 F4
SR1 SR2 OPT HEX
0V 48V
0V 48V
X20 X21
0V 48V
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10
0V NU GND 48V 0V NU GND 48V
The DCUC 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel output
connectors, via four circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
25 A for F1 and F2, which supply the connectors for the STASRs.
15 A for F3, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optional
equipment (such as microwave or termination of network lines equipment)
15 A for F4, which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers
The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCUC and connected to each output
connector.
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10
48V
Equipment labels
Front View
Black 0V
Blue 48V
GND
Side View
Connector Description
13 ACRI
This section describes and illustrates the ACRI, showing the functional blocks
and their interfaces.
A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showing
the connectors and controls.
The ACRI is housed in the SRACDC. The following figure shows the functional
block diagram.
ANPS
DC/DC
48 VDC Converter
Input Supply
Output Voltages
FACB FANUs
Fan Alarms
Power BCB
ASIC XBCB
Alarms
RI
EEPROM
The ACRI consists of the functional entities described in the following table.
ANPS The ANPS which the -48 VDC input supply to the DC voltages
required by the other components. For more information on the
ANPS, refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5) .
FACB The FACB reports fan faults and controls the FANUs that cool
the SRACDC modules. For more information on the FANUs
and FACB, refer to Fan Units (Section 11.1.1) and Fan Control
(Section 11.1.2) , respectively.
XBCB The way in which the BCB ASIC transfers information to the
OMU in the SUMP depends on the ACRI variant. For the indoor
variant, the information is transferred via the BCB, available
on the backplane. For the outdoor variant, the information is
transferred via the XBCB connector on the front panel.
This information consists of:
Fan status
Number of PM08s fitted
Battery malfunction
BCU1 failure.
LEDs
POWER ON
Connector
Handle
Serial interface for the transfer of alarms and Remote Inventory information
to the OMU.
Operating principles
Types.
14.1.2 Types
Even though the LPQG, LPQD, LPQP, and LPQM types can have different
suppliers, the product numbers are always identical. The following table lists
the product numbers.
Frequency
(kHz)
0 2 100
As lightning has a power spectrum with very little energy above 100 kHz, a
band-pass protection filter can be used. This passes the frequencies of interest
(which are much above 100 kHz), yet rejects the low frequencies generated by
lightning. The antenna connector lightning protectors perform this function
using the quarter-wavelength shorting stub.
Signal
Signal
Path
Summed
Signal
Split
Shield/
Chassis
Ground
100 %
Reflection
(180
Delay)
Shorting Stub = l /4
(+ 90 Short
Delay for Signals Circuit
of F = 1/l)
Impedance: 50 50 50 50
VShaped
Grounding Washers
Plinth
Sealing Washers
Quarter
Wavelength
Shorting Stub
The protectors are mounted in the plinth at the bottom of the cabinet. Each
protector consists of a coaxial through-connection with the protection
mechanism located below the plinth.
15 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
Antennas
Duplexer Duplexer
TMAs
Duplexer Duplexer
Feeders
Mobile Unit
BTS
Antenna Network
combining: ANCx
TRE TRE
Lower output favorably impacts the standby time of every mobile station
15.2 Architecture
For TMA usage two solutions are available:
Antennas
Duplexer Duplexer
Tower
Mounted
Amplifiers . . .
Duplexer Duplexer
Feeders
BTS
Bias T
.
.
.
Bias T
. . .
Power Distribution Unit
External Alarms 48 V DC
The PDU is designed to supply and to monitor up to six TMAs (typical BTS
configuration of 3x2 TRXs/TREs), independently of their frequency band (i.e.,
the same PDU equipment can be used with the TMA of GSM 900, GSM 1800,
and GSM 1900. In fact, the PDU has no frequency notation).
For indoor BTS installations, the PDU can be installed on the wall or in a
separate transmission cabinet (if available) and be powered by the BTS power
supply. For outdoor BTS configurations, it is possible to install the PDU inside
the BTS cabinet. The PDU is also powered by the BTS power supply.
TMA TMA
Duplexer Duplexer
Fixed
TMA Rx Gain
Duplexer Duplexer
AGC
TRE
Bias
TRE Bias
15.3.1 Appearance
The tower-mounted amplifier includes a low noise amplifier for the receive path
and a double duplexer TX/RX for one antenna port. It is designed for outdoor
installation on a tubular mounted support below the antenna. Amplifiers for
GSM 900 and GSM 1800/ GSM 1900 are offered by different manufacturers.
Therefore, the appearance of TMAs can differ, as shown in the following
example figures.
Top View Side View
Front View
BTS ANT
Antenna Mast
Bottom View
Frequency range 925 - 960 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz
RX
Frequency range 880 - 915 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz
TX
The back side of the tower-mounted amplifier is so formed that it can be easily
attached on the same vertical tubular support as the antenna using one (GSM
1800/ GSM 1900) or two (GSM 900) stainless steel attachment collars provided
as close as possible to the antenna.
The equipment is guaranteed to be watertight when the equipment is installed
with the connectors downwards and the two coaxial cables (jumpers) connected
to the equipment. The connectors on the jumpers are insulated at both ends,
i.e., one at the antenna connector, two at the tower-mounted amplifier, and one
at the feeder head.
There are two 7/ 16 female connectors marked BTS and ANT on the front
(lower side down). The antenna connector is connected to the antenna by an
RF jumper. The BTS connector is connected to the transmission/reception
coaxial cable going down to the BTS by an RF jumper.
The tower-mounted amplifier is fitted with an M6 threaded rod for grounding via
a black 16 mm ground cable (in the installation kit) connected to the pylon
or building ground, depending on the installation.
15.4.1 Appearance
The following figures show the Power Distribution Units.
Serial no. label
Fixing hole
LEDs
Reset button
Power switch
1 2 1 14 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Terminal blocks
(secondary power
connection)
Figure 449: Power Distribution Unit, Wall Version for BTS Indoor
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
14
1
2
1
Power supply
cable
Figure 450: Power Distribution Unit, 19" Version for BTS Outdoor
15.4.4 Switching On
Before switching on the power supply at the PDU input, all switches have to
be in the OFF position (all LEDs are also OFF). When the main power is
switched on, the orange LED main power indicates the presence of primary
voltage, while the three green LEDs indicate that the secondary power for
all separate channels is available.
The six red LEDs (for channel 1 to channel 6) indicate when the tower-mounted
amplifier alarms come on. After switching on the separate channel switches
and pressing the reset buttons, the corresponding tower-mounted amplifiers
are supplied and the red LEDs are OFF.
15.5 Bias T
The Bias T unit (part number 3BK 08453 ABAA or 3BK 08454 ABAA) is a
power supply injector to transport the + 12 VDC power supply energy to
the tower-mounted amplifier through the coaxial cable between the antenna
and the BTS.
The injector is designed for indoor and outdoor installation between the BTS
and the coaxial transmission-reception cable.
Two Bias T versions are available:
Bias T for indoor BTS-RF connectors 7/ 16 male/ side TMA; female/ side
BTS
The outdoor version is normally combined with a 90 bend. Both indoor and
outdoor versions are combined with a surge arrestor.
The following figures show the Bias T units.
Ground Terminal
7/16 Male connector Screw M6
to TMA
ANT
BTS
Male Connector
to PDU
Ground Terminal
7/16 Female connector Screw M6
to TMA
ANT
BTS
15.6 Installation
15.6.1 Indoor Installation
Depending on the installation, the distance between the BTS, the Power
Distribution Unit, and the Tower-Mounted Amplifier can be variable. Therefore
the RF jumper cables are defined to cover this flexibility. The PDU and Bias T
are installed outside the BTS.
The following figure shows an indoor installation.
ANTENNA
TMA
ANT BTS
GND connection
Ground bar
RF jumper RF jumper
Feeder
Surge Arrestor
RF jumper
Alarm
Wall Installation cable
PDU
BTS indoor
DC cable
to power supply GND connection
ANTENNA
TMA
ANT BTS
GND connection
Ground bar
RF jumper RF jumper
Feeder
Ground cable
BTS Outdoor
DC cable to
power supply
COAR
Bus bar
Octopus cable
fitted with 6 cables
Alarm cable
Surge Arrestor
Bias T with 90
RF jumper
ANTENNA
TMA
ANT BTS
GND connection
Ground bar
RF jumper RF jumper
Feeder
Ground cable
Bus bar
BTS Outdoor
DC cable to
power supply
19 subrack
OUTC
Octopus cable
fitted with 6 cables
Surge Arrestor
Bias T with 90
RF jumper
braid overturned
30 mm shrink sheath
16 Cable Descriptions
16.1.1 ANCO
The following figure shows the ANCO (part number 3BK 26151) connections.
Lightning Protector AN
Shield
16.1.2 ANIC
The following figure shows the ANIC (part number 3BK 07921) connections.
ANT Cabinet Connector AN
Shield
M3 Thread
16.1.3 ANLC
The following figure shows the ANLC (part number 3BK 26349) connections.
Lightning Protector AN
Shield
16.1.4 ANOC
The following figure shows the ANOC (part number 3BK 07965) connections.
Lightning Protector AN
Shield
Type 7/16, right angle, male Type 7/16, right angle, male
16.1.5 BOBU
This section describes both Variant AA and Variant CA of the BOBU.
P13
P2
P19
P3
P4
P5 P20
P6
P7 P21
P8 P22
P14 P23
P24
P25
P9
P26
P15
P27
P16
P17
P10
P11
P18 P28
P12
P1 Service Light
Supply
P5 Option X1
Smoke Alarm,
P19
+24 V / 0 V
Supply
P6 Option X2
P2 PDU3 (STASR 6)
Supply
P7 Option X3
P3 PDU2 (STASR 4)
Supply
P8 Option X4
P4 PDU1 (STASR 1)
XIOB and
Options
P14 STASR 6
STASR 3
P23 48 V Filter
P24 0 V Bolt
P25 Ground Bolt
P26 STASR 2
STASR 2
P27 STASR 1
STASR 1
P15 STASR 5
STASR 6
STASR 5
P16 STASR 4
STASR 4
P12 HEAT
Bottom 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Layer: Signal: Layer: Signal: Layer: Signal: Layer: Signal:
1 WATER 4T/B SMOKE / DOOR1 7 48VG 10 GND0V
2 HEX21 5T/B 24V / DOOR2 8T/B 48V0 / 48VG 11 NF1
3 HEX22 6 XGND 9 GND0V 12 T / B LIF1 / LIF2
Connector Type
P5, P6, P7, P8, P11 Mate-N-Lock, female with female contacts.
16.1.6 BOMU
Diagrams illustrate both the BOMUs appearance and its circuit schematics.
16.1.6.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOMU (part number
3BK 25672).
16.1.7 BOMUE
This section uses diagrams to illustrate both the BOMUs appearance and its
circuit schematics.
16.1.7.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOMUE (part
number 3BK 27262).
16.1.8 BOMUT
Diagrams illustrate both the BOMUTs appearance and its circuit schematics.
16.1.8.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and side views of the BOMUT (part
number 3BK 27143).
16.1.9 BOSU
The following sections describe the BOSU variants, AA and CA, in terms of
appearance and connections.
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P2 P12
P10
P11
P3
P1 Service Light
Layer: Signal:
1 XGND
P4 Service Filter 2 DOOR
3 HEX2
4 GND
P5 ACSB/ASCU 5 NF1
6T/B LIF1 / LIF2
P6 Heater Filter
P7 COAR Alarms
P8 48 VDC Input
Keyswitch
P9 0 VDC Input
Heater Module
P3 HEAT2
Bottom 1 2 3 4 5 6
16.1.10 BTSRI3
The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRI3I (part number
3BK 25973).
STASR 1 STASR 2 STASR 3 TFBP
BTSRI
1 1
44 45
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
16.1.11 BTSRI5
The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRI5 (part number
3BK 25974).
STASR 1 STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 TFBP
BTSRI
1 1
44 45 46 47
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
16.1.12 BTSRIMA
The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRIMA (part number
3BK 07720).
STASR 1 STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 TFBP
BTSRI
1 1
44 45 46 47
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
16.1.13 BTSRIMI
The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRIMI (part number
3BK 07720).
STASR 1 STASR 2 TFBP
BTSRI
1 1
44
P1 P2 P3 P4
16.1.14 BTSRIOUT
The following figure shows the connections for the BTSRIOUT (part number
3BK 08126).
Variant CA
Variant AA
44
P1 P2 P3 P4
16.1.15 BUMA
The following figure shows the BUMA (part number 3BK 07762) cableform
connections.
x7 (Red)
P1 GND
x7 (Black)
P2 Filter
x7 (Blue)
P3 Breakers
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
P4 XIOB
x3 (Red, Blue, Black) Top Fan
Backplane P5
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
Subrack 5 P6
Subrack 1 5 and
GND Bolt Filter Breakers XIOB Top Fan Backplane
2 48 V
3 0V
4 3 1
P4 P5 to P10
x7 3 1 4 1
P1 P2 P3
16.1.16 BUMI
The following figure shows the BUMI (part number 3BK 07763) cableform
connections.
x4 (Red)
P1 GND
x4 (Black)
P2 Filter
x4 (Blue)
P3 Breakers
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
P4 XIOB
x3 (Red, Blue, Black) Top Fan
Backplane P5
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
Subrack 2 P6
Subrack 1, 2 and
GND Bolt Filter Breakers XIOB Top Fan Backplane
2 48 V
3 0V
4 3 1
P4 P5 to P7
x4 3 1 4 1
P1 P2 P3
16.1.17 CA12
The following figure shows the connections for the CA12 (part number 3BK
08086).
STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR5
1 1
BTSRIOUT
Connector
45 46 47
P1 P2 P3 P4
16.1.18 CA-2MMC2
The following figure shows the CA-2MMC2 (part number 3BK 08289)
connections.
COAR Microwave UL
Black 2
7
Transparent
6 7
Screen 1
1
3 Screen
5
Transparent
8 9
Black
9 4
1 5 1 5
6 9 6 9
16.1.19 CA-ABIS
The following figure shows the CA-ABIS (part number 3BK 07922) connections.
SUM side Shield BTSCA
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
6 9 9 6
16.1.20 CA-ACB2
The following figure shows the CA-ACB2 (part number 3BK 08091) cable
connections.
BTS Compartment 2 COAR
P2
2
5 4
P1
6 5
P1 P3
1 5 5 1
6 9 9 6
P1: 9pin SubD male
P2: Receptacle Faston 4.8 x 0.5
P3: 9pin SubD female
16.1.21 CA-ACSC
The following figure shows the CA-ACSC (part number 3BK 08078) cable
connections.
Side Compartment COAR
1
P2
2
4
P3
5
5 6
P1
6 7
P1 P4
1 5 1 5
6 9 6 9
P1 P4: 9pin SubD male
P2: Receptacle Faston 4.8 x 0.5
P3: DIN wire ferrules
16.1.24 CA-ADCO
The following figure shows the CA-ADCO (part number 3BK 07953) cable
connections.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16.1.25 CA-ALPC
The following figures show the CA-ALPC (part number 3BK 26348) cable
connections.
Alarm
1
P2 To Door Switch
2
Alarm +
6 9 Alarm
7 5 Alarm +
4 48 V 6
5 P4 To DCUC X8
48 V 7
P3
0V 2
OUTC P5 To DCUC X7
0V 3
P1
HEX5
P1 9Pin SubD Female
P2 Wire Ferrules
P3 9Pin SubD Male
P4, P5 Twin Wire Ferrules
16.1.26 CA-APC2
The following figure shows the CA-APC2 (part number 3BK 08215) cable
connections.
BTS Compartment 1 COAR
2
P4
3
6
P3
7
11
P2
12
5 14
P1
6 15
P1 P5
1 5 8 1
6 9 15 9
16.1.27 CA-ASMC
The following figure shows the CA-ASMC (part number 3BK 08807)
connections.
ACIB ACSB
1 Black 2
2 Black 1
3 Blue
4 Brown
P1
Yellow/Green
P2 P3
4 1
P1 P2
16.1.30 CA-BTSCA
The following figure shows the CA-BTSCA (part number 3BK 07923)
connections.
SUM side BTSCA
1 1
16.1.31 CA-CSTR
The following figure shows the connections for the CA-CSTR (part number
3BK 25178).
STASR 7 RIBAT2 RIBAT1 COAR
1 1
BTSRIOUT
Connector
45 50
P1 P2 P3 P4
16.1.32 CA-DFUX
The following figure shows the CA-DFUX (part number 3BK 08503) cable
connections.
SUM Microwave UX
1
20
Pair 1 2
21
3
Pair 2 22
Pair 3 4
23
Pair 4 5
24
Rx
Blue 6
Pair 5
25
Pair 6 7
26
8
Pair 7 27
9
Pair 8
28
P1
10
29
Pair 1 11
30
12
Pair 2 31
Pair 3 13
32
14
Pair 4
33
TX
Red 15
Pair 5
34
Pair 6 16
35
17
Pair 7 36
18
Pair 8
37
P2
P3
P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 1 19
20 37
P1: Pouyet, P44920CA blue
P2: Pouyet, P44920CA red
P3: 37pin SubD male
16.1.33 CA-GCMW
The following figure shows the CA-GCMW (part number 3BK 07934)
connections.
Ground Microwave
Equipment
Yellow/Green
16.1.34 CA-Ground
The following figure shows the CA-Ground (part number 3BK 25182)
connections.
LPFU CABABRM: Blue Bottom Plate
CABABRP: Black
16.1.35 CA-Ground1
The following figure shows the CA-Ground1 (part number 3BK 08118)
connections.
SRACDC ACSB
Yellow/Green
16.1.36 CA-Ground2
The following figure shows the CA-Ground2 (part number 3BK 08177)
connections.
SRACDC ACSB
Yellow/Green
16.1.37 CA-H2PC1
The following figure shows the CA-H2PC1 (part number 3BK 08077)
connections.
HEX2 DCDP
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
9 6 6 9
16.1.38 CA-H2PC2
The following figure shows the CA-H2PC2 (part number 08092) connections.
COAR DCDP
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
1 5 1 5
6 9 6 9
16.1.39 CA-H2PC3
The following figure shows the CA-H2PC3 (part number 3BK 08093)
connections.
HEX2 COAR
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
9 6 9 6
16.1.40 CA-HOAP
The following figure shows the CA-HOAP (part number 3BK 25820)
connections.
HEX3 BOMU
5 4
9 3
2
2
3
6
1
7
Matenlock, male
9pin SubD female
1 5 4 1
6 9
16.1.41 CA-MLBP
The following figure shows the CA-MLBP (part number 3BK 08886)
connections.
Microwave UL BOBU
1 2
5 1
5 1
16.1.42 CA-MXBP
The following figure shows the CA-MXBP (part number 3BK 08886)
connections.
Microwave UX BOBU
1 1
3 2
SubD size A for three HP contacts, male and female Matenlock, male
2 1
3 1
16.1.43 CA-OHAC
The following figure shows the CA-OHAC (part number 3BK 08810)
connections.
HEX2 BOSU or BOBU
1 1
9 2
HEX2
2
3
3
6
4
7
Matenlock, male
9pin SubD female
1 5 4 1
6 9
16.1.44 CA-ONCCx
The CA-ONCCx cable has three connection types. Each type is illustrated in a
separate diagram.
1
COAR/ABIS2
P1
6
9
SUM
P2
4
3 2 1
P1, P5
1
Matenlock, male
Customer 2
Equipment
1 5
8
P2, P3, P4
9 9
6
9pin SubD male
7
COAR/ABIS1
P3
6
9
BOBU
P4
2
P5
6
COAR/ABIS2
P1
6
9
SUM
P2
4
1
1 5
2
Customer P1 to P5
Equipment
6 9
8
9pin SubD male
9
7
COAR/ABIS1
P3
6
9
DCDP
P4
1
P5
9
SUM
P1
4
1 5
2
Customer
Equipment P1, P2, P3
8 6 9
9pin SubD male
9
7
COAR/ABIS1
P2
6
P3
16.1.45 CA-OSCP1
The following figure shows the CA-OSCP1 (part number 3BK 08095) cable
connections.
Side Compartment
6 9
16.1.46 CA-OSCP2
The following figure shows the CA-OSCP2 (part number 3BK 08096) cable
connections.
BTS Compartment 1
6 9
16.1.47 CA-OSCP3
The following figure shows the CA-OSCP3 (part number 3BK 25548) cable
connections.
CBO
16.1.48 CA-OSPC
The following figure shows the CA-OSPC (part number 3BK 08079)
connections.
STASR DCDP
48 V 1
GND 2
0V 3
3 1
16.1.50 CA-PCOS
The following figure shows the CA-PCOS (part number 3BK 08809)
connections.
STASR BOBU
1 3
3 2
4 1
16.1.52 CA-RFMW
The following figure shows the CA-RFMW (part number 3BK 07931)
connections.
Connection Area Microwave Equipment
Shield
16.1.53 CA-RIBCO
The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RIBCO (part number
3BK 26347).
STASR 1 STASR 2
OUTC
Flat
Cable
Connector
Side
Compart
ment
44*
P1 P2 P3
16.1.54 CA-RICPT1
The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RICPT1 (part number
3BK 25537).
STASR 2 STASR 3
OUTC 1
Flat
Cable
Connector
Side
Compart 44 45
ment
P1 P2 P3
16.1.55 CA-RICPT2
The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RICPT2 (part number
3BK 25538).
STASR 4 STASR 5 STASR 6
OUTC 1 1
Flat
Cable
Connector
Side 44
Compart 45
46 47 48
ment 1
P1 P2 P3 P4
16.1.56 CA-RIMO1
The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RIMO1 (part number
3BK 25822).
STASR 1 STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 7
OUTC
Flat
Cable
Connector
Side
Compart
ment
44* 45* 44, 45,
46, 47,
48*
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
16.1.57 CA-RIMO2
The following figure shows the connections for the CA-RIMO2 (part number
3BK 25823).
STASR 4 STASR 5 STASR 6 STASR 0
OUTC
Flat
Cable
Connector
BTS
Compart
ment 1
44, 45, 47* 48* 44, 45*
46*
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
16.1.58 CA-SENSP
The following figure shows the CA-SENSP (part number 3BK 26147)
connections.
1
7
Resistor
105 Ohm 1%
8
16.1.59 CA-XBCBO
The following figure shows the CA-XBCBO (part number 3BK 08205)
connections.
ACRI COAR
15 15
16.1.60 CA-XIOC
The following figure shows the CA-XIOC (part number 3BK 26353) connections.
XIOB
16.1.61 CA-XIOPC
The following figure shows the CA-XIOPC (part number 3BK 08087)
connections.
DCDP
XIOB
6
1 7
2 8
3 9
6 9
Fixing Rail
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
P6 Subrack 5
Fixing Holes
Bus Bar
Subrack 1 5 and
GND Bolt Filter Breakers XIOB Top Fan Backplane
2 48 V
3 0V
4 3 1
P4 P5 P10
x7 3 1 4 1
P1 P2 P3
P1: Spade, made, M8 hole
P2: Spade, male, M6 hole
P3: Spade, male, open tongue, M5
P4: Matenlock, female
P5 P10: Triple Faston, female
Bus Bar
Subrack 1, 2 and
GND Bolt Filter Breakers XIOB Top Fan Backplane
2 48 V
3 0V
4 3 1
P4 P5 P7
x4 3 1 4 1
P1 P2 P3
P1: Spade, made, M8 hole
P2: Spade, male, M6 hole
P3: Spade, male, open tongue, M5
P4: Matenlock, female
P5 P7: Triple Faston, female
16.1.64 RXRC
The following figure shows the RXRC (part number 3BK 07920) connections.
TRE/AN AN
Shield
Alignment
Hole
P1 P2
Note: For ANS modules only one RXRC line is fitted
16.1.65 TXRC
The following figure shows the TXRC (part number 3BK 07919) connections.
TRE/AN AN
Shield
16.2.1 CA01
The following figure shows the CA01 (part number 3BK 07594) Abis cable
connections.
BTS A9100 side Customers Distribution Board
5 Shield
6 9
16.2.2 CA02
The following figure shows the CA02 (part number 3BK 07595) Abis cable
connections.
BTS A9100 side Customers Distribution Board
6 Shield
1 5
6 9
16.2.3 CA03
The following figure shows the CA03 (part number 3BK 07596) Abis cable
connections.
TX
Shield
RX
16.2.4 CA04
The following figure shows the CA04 (part number 3BK 07597) Abis cable
connections.
Shield
16.2.5 CA-CBTE
The following figure shows the CA-CBTE (part number 3BK 07951) cable
connections.
SUM BTS Terminal
Shield
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
6 9 9 6
16.2.6 CA-GC35
The following figure shows the CA-GC35 (part number 3BK 08031) cable
connections.
BTS A9100 Customers Ground Point
16.2.7 CA-GND
The following figure shows the CA-GND (part number 3BK 25349) cable
connection.
Lug, Ring M8 Lug, Ring M8
16.2.8 CA-PC2W16
The following figure shows the CA-PC2W16 (part number 3BK 08029) cable
connections.
BTS A9100 Customers 48/0 VDC Source
Black Wire 0 V Black Wire 0 V
1 3
1 2 3 4
16.2.9 CA-PC35BK
The following figure shows the CA-PC35BL (part number 3BK 08032) cable
connections.
BTS A9100 Customers 0 VDC Source
16.2.10 CA-PC35BL
The following figure shows the CA-PC35BL (part number 3BK 08032) cable
connections.
BTS A9100 Customers 48 VDC Source
16.2.11 CA-PCEBM
The following figure shows the CA-PCEBM (part number 3BK 25260) cable
connection.
Lug, Ring M6 Shrinking Sleeve Lug, Pin
16.2.12 CA-PCEBP
The following figure shows the CA-PCEBP (part number 3BK 25259) cable
connection.
Lug, Ring M6 Shrinking Sleeve Lug, Pin
16.2.13 CA-RIBEB
The following figure shows the CA-RIBEB (part number 3BK 25258) cable
connections.
15 pin male connector 15 pin female connector
123
123 123
123
123 123
Wiring list
8 8
15 COAR/OUTC Side External Battery Side Quad Number
15
P1/male P2/female
16.2.14 CA-RIBEO
The following figure shows the CA-RIBEO (part number 3BK 26138) cable
connections.
15 pin female connector
(to first RIBAT at external
Battery Cabinet outdoor;
15 pin male connector assembling on site after
(to OUTC at BTS ) guiding through cable gland)
1234
1234 1234
1234
1234 1234
8 Wiring list 8
15 15
COAR/OUTC Side External Battery Side Quad Number
P1/male P2/female
16.2.15 OCC23
The following figure shows the OCC23 (part number 3BK 08303) cable
connections.
BTS A9100 G2 BTS
1 Shield
1
5 5
9 9
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 6
6 9 6 9
16.2.16 OCC33
The following figure shows the OCC33 (part number 3BK 08304) cable
connections.
BTS A9100 BTS A9100
1 Shield
1
5 5
9 9
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 6
6 9 6 9
16.2.17 SCG2/3
The following figure shows the SCG2/3 (part number 3BK 08101) cable
connections.
G2 BTS BTS A9100
1 Shield
1
5 5
9 9
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 6
5 1 6 9
16.2.18 SCG3
The following figure shows the SCG3 (part number 3BK 07950) cable
connections.
COAR of First BTS A9100 COAR of Second BTS A9100
1 Shield
1
2 2
6 6
3 3
7 7
4 4
8 8
5 5
9 9
6 9 6 9
16.2.19 SCM1/3
The following figure shows the SCM1/3 (part number 3BK 08102) cable
connections.
BTS A9100 G1 BTS Mark1
1 Shield
1
5 9
9 5
P3
4 6
8 2
3 7
7 3
2 8
6 4
P1 P2
9 6
P3
5 1
9 6 1 5
Shield Solder Point
P1 P2
5 1 6 9
16.2.20 SCM2/3
The following figure shows the SCM2/3 (part number 3BK 08103) cable
connections.
G1 BTS Mark2 BTS A9100
1 Shield
1
5 5
9 9
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 6
5 1 6 9
17 Environment
The following sections describe the environment, and provide data tables,
where necessary. References to the relevant European and International
standards are also given, when appropriate.
Environmental requirements
Operational conditions
Transportation conditions
Storage conditions.
Environmental requirements
Operational conditions
Transportation conditions
Storage conditions.
Shock - 70 m/ s2
EMC immunity
Transient bursts
Spurious emissions.
ETS 300 342 Part 2, and Draft ETSI EN 300 342 Part 2.
Parameter Standard
Radiated Fields IEC 1000-4-3: 3 V/ m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz (+ 1.8 GHz excepted reception band).
Transient Pulse Immunity IEC 1000-4-4: Levels 2 and 3 (see Table Permitted Transient Bursts (177) ).
ETS 300 342-2.
Surges (on AC lines) IEC 1000-4-5: level 500 V at differential mode; level 1 kV at common mode.
(TM)
Note that all outdoor 9100 BTS external lines have better surge protection
characteristics than that defined in IEC 1000-4-5.
Note: The amplitudes shown in the above table must not exceed 50 ns duration or
have a rise time of less than 5 ns.
Conducted Emissions on EN 55022 Class B (AC powered BTS) 150 kHz - 30 MHz
Power Lines:
EN 55022 Class A (DC powered BTS)
Electric shock
Skin burns
Mechanical hazards
Energy hazards
Chemical hazards.
The indoor and outdoor BTS are compliant with the following safety standards:
Indoor BTS
EN60215 - Safety Requirements for Radio Transmitting Equipment
EN60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
Outdoor BTS
EN60215 - Safety Requirements for Radio Transmitting Equipment
EN60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment
EN41003 - Safety Requirements for Apparatus for Connection to
Telecommunications Networks
ISO 3864 - Safety Colors and Safety Signs.